Promaster City (2016) - Car RAM - Free user manual and instructions

Product Type	Compact Cargo or Passenger Van
Model Year	2016
Engine	2.4L I4 (estimate) or 2.0L Diesel (optional)
Transmission	9-Speed Automatic
Drivetrain	Front-Wheel Drive
Fuel Type	Regular Unleaded Gasoline
Fuel Tank Capacity	Approximately 20 gallons (75.7 liters)
Seating Capacity	Up to 5 (Passenger) or 2 (Cargo)
Key System	Sentry Key Immobilizer with Remote Keyless Entry
Power Windows	Front with Auto-Up/Down and Anti-Trap
Airbags	Advanced Front Airbags, Side Airbags (SAB), Side Curtain (SABIC)
Seat Belts	Lap/Shoulder with Pretensioners and ALR for child seats
LATCH Anchors	Two lower anchors per rear seat position + Top Tether
Braking System	ABS with Electronic Brake Distribution, Brake Assist
Stability Control	Electronic Stability Control (ESC) with Roll Mitigation
Tire Pressure Monitoring	Direct TPMS with individual sensor display
Cruise Control	Electronic Speed Control with set/resume
Rear Park Assist	ParkSense with audible warnings (if equipped)
Oil Capacity	Approximately 5 quarts (4.7 liters) with filter
Recommended Oil	SAE 5W-20 or 0W-20 meeting Chrysler MS-6395
Maintenance Interval	Oil change every 6000 miles or 6 months
Warranty	3-year/36,000-mile basic, 5-year/60,000-mile powertrain

Frequently Asked Questions - Promaster City (2016) RAM

How do I reset the oil change indicator?

Turn the ignition OFF. Press and hold the trip odometer reset button. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN. Continue holding the button until the oil change icon resets (about 10 seconds). Release the button.

How do I pair my phone via Bluetooth?

Ensure Bluetooth is enabled on your phone. On the Uconnect system, press the Phone button, then 'Pair a Phone'. Search for Uconnect on your phone, enter the PIN displayed on the screen, and confirm pairing.

How do I use cruise control?

Reach cruising speed. Press the ON/OFF button on the steering wheel. Press the SET/- button to engage. Use RES/+ to resume or accelerate, and SET/- to decelerate. Press CANCEL to disengage.

How do I open the double rear swing doors from inside?

Pull the interior release lever located on the left rear trim panel to open the first door. Then pull the handle on the first door to open the second door.

How do I activate the vehicle security alarm?

Lock the doors using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) fob. The alarm will arm after a short delay. The turn signals flash to confirm. To disarm, press the UNLOCK button on the RKE fob.

What type of engine oil does the Promaster City require?

Use SAE 5W-20 or 0W-20 engine oil that meets Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Check the oil dipstick for proper level.

How do I replace the remote key fob battery?

Press the mechanical key release button to remove the key. Use a small screwdriver to turn the screw on the side of the fob. Remove the battery case, replace with a CR2032 battery observing polarity, and reassemble.

How do I adjust the upper shoulder belt anchorage?

Press or squeeze the release button on the shoulder belt anchor. Slide the anchor up or down to a position that places the belt across your chest, not your neck. Release to lock.

How do I use the automatic locking mode for child seats?

Buckle the lap/shoulder belt. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out until it stops. Let the belt retract; you'll hear a clicking sound. The belt is now in Automatic Locking Mode (ALR). To release, unbuckle and let fully retract.

What should I do if the tire pressure warning light comes on?

Check each tire's pressure with a gauge and inflate to the recommended pressure listed on the driver's door placard. If the light remains on after inflation, visit an authorized dealer for TPMS service.

USER MANUAL Promaster City (2016) RAM

2016

PROMASTER CITY

OWNER'S MANUAL

VEHICLESSOLDINCANADA

WithrespecttoanyVehiclesSoldinCanada,thenameFCA USLLCshallbedeemedtobedeletedandthenameFCA CanadaInc. usedinsubstitutiontherefore.

DRIVINGANDALCOHOL

Drunkendrivingisoneofthemostfrequentcausesof accidents.

Yourdrivingabilitycanbeseriouslyimpairedwithblood alcohollevelsfarbelowthelegalminimum.Ifyouare drinking,don'tdrive.Ridewithadesignatednon-drinkingdriver,callacab,afriend,orusepublictransportation.

WARNING!

Drivingafterdrinkingcanleadtoanaccident. Yourperceptionsarelesssharp,yourreflexesare slower,andyourjudgmentisimpairedwhenyou havebeendrinking.Neverdrinkandthendrive.

Thismanualillustratesanddescribestheoperationof featuresandequipmentthatareeitherstandardorop-tionalonthisvehicle. Thismanualmayalsoincludea descriptionoffeaturesandequipmentthatarenolonger availableorwerenotorderedonthisvehicle.Please disregardanyfeaturesandequipmentdescribedinthis manualthatarenotonthisvehicle.

FCAUSLLCreservestherighttomakechangesindesign andspecifications, and/ormakeadditionstoorimprovementstoitsproductswithoutimposinganyobligation uponitselftoinstallthemonproductspreviouslymanufactured.

Copyright©2016FCAUSLLC

SECTION PAGE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 INTRODUCTION....3
2 THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE. 9
3 UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE. 93
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL....147
5 STARTING AND OPERATING ....
6 WHAT TODOINEMERGENCIES....
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE....
8 MAINTENANCESCHEDULES. 403
9 IFYOUNEEDCONSUMERASSISTANCE. 409
10 INDEX 4 10

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS

■INTRODUCTION....4
■HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL....4
■WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS....6

■VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS....6
■VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER....6
■VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS....7

4 INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION

Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.

This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should bestored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold.

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your satisfaction.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire.

Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle's equipment.

The detailed index at the back of this Owner's Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects.

Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner's Manual:

010533317

6 INTRODUCTION

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This Owner's Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner's Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.

VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS

The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body modifications or special equipment installed by van conversion/camper manufacturers/body builders. Refer to the Warranty Information book, Section 2.1.C. Such equipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and service on these items, contact the applicable manufacturer.

Operating instructions for the special equipment installed by the conversion/camper manufacturer should also be supplied with your vehicle. If these instructions are missing, please contact your authorized dealer for assistance in obtaining replacement documents from the applicable manufacturer.

For information on the Body Builders Guide refer to: www.rambodybuilder.com. This website contains dimensional and technical specifications for your vehicle. It is intended for Second Stage Manufacturer's technical support. For service issues, contact your authorized dealer.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through the windshield. This number also appears on the vehicle

frame and underbody as well as the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.

Side view of a car with a white arrow pointing to the front wheel (no text or symbols visible)

VehicleIdentificationNumber

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!

Anymodificationsoralterationstothisvehiclecould seriouslyaffectitsroadworthinessandsafetyand mayleadtoacollisionresultinginseriousinjuryor death.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

■A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS....12

□Ignition Key Removal....12

□Locking Doors With A Key....14

□Key-In-Ignition Reminder....14

■SENTRY KEY....14

□Replacement Keys....15

□General Information....16

■ VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .16

□Rearming Of The System....16

□To Arm The System....17

□To Disarm The System....17

□Security System Manual Override....17

■REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) ..... 1 7

□To Unlock The Doors....18

□To Lock The Doors....19

□Programming Additional RKE Key Fobs ..... 1 9

□RKE Key Fob Battery Replacement ..... 1 9

□General Information....20

■DOOR LOCKS 20

□ Locking The Doors From The Outside .....21

10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

□Unlock The Doors From The Outside ..... 2 2

□Unlocking The Rear Cargo Area From Inside The Vehicle....2 2

□Sliding Side Doors. 2 2

□Child Lock System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 2 3

□Auto Unlock Doors....24

■WINDOWS....25

□Power Windows — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 2 5

□Wind Buffeting....27

■SLIDING SIDE DOOR....28

□Opening And Closing From Outside The Vehicle....28

□Opening And Closing From The Inside . . . . . . 2 9

□Child Lock System....29

□Key Emergency Lock (KEL) Device ..... 2 9

■DOUBLE REAR SWING DOORS....30

□Opening/Closing The First Swing Door From The Outside....3 1

☐Emergency Opening Of The First Swing Door From The Inside....3 1

□Opening The Second Swing Door ..... 3 1

■OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..... 3 1

□ Important Safety Precautions .....31

□ Seat Belt Systems .....33

□Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ..... 4 6

□Child Restraints....60

□Transporting Pets 85

■ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS....86

■SAFETY TIPS 86

□Transporting Passengers. 86

□Exhaust Gas 87

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11

□Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle....88

☐Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle....90

12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS

The RKE Key Fob contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob with an integrated key. To use the mechanical key, simply push the mechanical key release button.

Illustration of a handheld device with internal components and a handle (no text or symbols)

0202076787

RKEKeyFobwiththeKeyBladeReleased

To order duplicate keys, please contact the authorized studio that sold you your new vehicle: it has the keys code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys.

Ignition Key Removal

1. Place the gear selector in PARK.
2. Rotate the key to the STOP/OFF/LOCK position.
3. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder.

IgnitionSwitchPositions

1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK)
2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
3—AVV (START)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• Beforeexitingvehicle, alwaysshiftthetransmissionintoPARK, applytheparkingbrake, and removetheRKEKeyFobfromthevehicle. When leavingthevehicle, alwayslockyourvehicle. In caseyouswitchoffthevehicleandthetransmissionisnotinPARKposition, awarningmessage willappearontheclusterwhichsuggestsyouto shiftthetransmissionintoPARKpositionand, then, youcanremovethekeywithin15seconds. If 15secondsexpire, youhavetorotatethekeyfrom OFF/LOCKpositiontoON/RUNpositionand comebacktoOFF/LOCKpositioninorderto removethekey.
• Neverleavechildrenaloneinvehicle,orwith accesstoan unlocked vehicle. Allowing childrento beinavehicleunattendedisdangerousfora

(Continued)

14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!(Continued)

numberofreasons.Achildorotherscouldbe seriouslyorfatallyinjured.Childrenshouldbe warnednottotouchtheparkingbrake,brakepedal orthegaselector.

• DonotleavetheRKEKeyFobinornearthe vehicle, orinalocationaccessibletochildren. A childcouldoperatepowerwindows, othercontrols, ormovethevehicle.
• Donotleavechildrenoranimalsinsideparked vehiclesinhotweather.Interiorheatbuild-upmay causeseriousinjuryordeath.

CAUTION!

An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove the RKE Key from the ignition and lock all the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

Locking Doors With A Key

You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the door, turn the key to the right. To unlock the door, turn the key to the left. Refer to "Body Lubrication" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for maintenance procedures.

Key-In-Ignition Reminder

Opening the driver's door when the key is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF/LOCK sounds a signal to remove the key.

SENTRY KEY

The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15

The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle.

NOTE:A key which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.

If the Vehicle Security Light is on after the key is turned to the ON/RUN position, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics.

CAUTION!

- Alwaysremove the Sentry Key from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

CAUTION!(Continued)

- The Sentry Key Immobilizersystem is not compatible with some aftermarket remotestartingsystems. Use of the systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection.

All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.

Replacement Keys

NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.

(Continued)

16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The VIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED

The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors and ignition for unauthorized operation. When the Vehicle Security Alarm is activated, interior switches for door locks are disabled. The system provides both audible and visible signals. Every intrusion attempt causes three continuous alarm cycles. Every alarm cycle lasts for 30 seconds. For 26 seconds, the horn will sound, and the turn signal lights will flash. For four seconds, it will pause. After a maximum of 10 alarm cycles, only the turn signal lights will flash until the next alarm activation.

Rearming Of The System

If the system has not been disabled, the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after processing all the alarm cycles related to the intrusion attempt. If the condition which initiated the alarm is still present, the system will ignore that condition and monitor the remaining doors and ignition.

To Arm The System

The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the RKE Key Fob to lock the doors. If a door or the hood is not properly shut, the alarm system will exclude the related door from protection.

To Disarm The System

Use the RKE Key Fob to unlock the door and disarm the system.

To exit the alarming mode, push the RKE Key Fob UNLOCK button and open the door.

The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17

you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

Security System Manual Override

The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)

This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a handheld RKE Key Fob. The RKE Key Fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.

18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects.

0202059783

RKEKeyFob

1 - Mechanical Key Release Button
2 - Driver Passenger Unlock Button
3 - Lock Button
4 - Cargo Lock/Unlock Button

To Unlock The Doors

CARGOVehicle

Push and release the UNLOCK button on RKE Key Fob to unlock the front two doors. Push and release the CARGO UNLOCK button on RKE Key Fob to unlock the cargo area (side lateral sliding doors and rear doors). The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal.

PassengerVehicle

Push and release the UNLOCK button on RKE Key Fob to unlock all doors. Push and release the CARGO UN-LOCK button on RKE Key Fob to unlock the cargo doors. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal.

To Lock The Doors

Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE Key Fob to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.

Programming Additional RKE Key Fobs

Refer to "Sentry Key" in "Things To Know Before Starting" for further information.

If you do not have a programmed RKE Key Fob, contact your authorized dealer for details.

RKE Key Fob Battery Replacement

NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.

1. Push the mechanical key release button and release the mechanical key to access the battery case screw located on the side of the RKE Key Fob.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19

1. Rotate the screw located on the side of the RKE Key Fob using a small screwdriver.

Close-up of a black handheld device labeled C265 with a white arrow pointing to a button (no readable text or symbols beyond the label)

RKEKeyFobScrewLocation

1. Take out the battery case. Remove and replace the battery observing its polarity.

2. Refit the battery case inside the RKE Key Fob and turn the screw to lock it into place.

20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

DOOR LOCKS

Interior view of a car dashboard with control buttons and a directional arrow (no text or symbols)

PowerDoorLocks

The door locks can be locked or unlocked from inside the vehicle by using the door handle.

• To lock the doors, push down on the door handle.
• To unlock the doors, pull up on the door handle.

Locking The Doors From The Outside

LockingwithanRKEKeyFob

0202059783

RKEKeyFob

1 - Mechanical Key Release Button
2 - Driver Passenger Unlock Button
3 - Lock Button
4 - Cargo Unlock Button

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21

Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE Key Fob to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.

LockingwiththeRKEkeyblade

Close-up of a car key with four function buttons and an upward arrow indicator (no text or symbols)

0202059782

RKEKeyBladeReleased

22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Push the Mechanical Key Release Button (item #1 shown above) to expose the RKE key blade, insert the key blade into the doors exterior lock cylinder and turn the key clockwise to lock the front door.

Unlock The Doors From The Outside

UnlockingwithanRKEKeyFob

On the Passenger Vehicle, push and release the UNLOCK button on RKE Key Fob to unlock all doors. On the Cargo Vehicle, push and release the UNLOCK button on RKE Key Fob to unlock the front two doors. Push and release the CARGO UNLOCK button on RKE Key Fob once to unlock the cargo area (side lateral sliding doors and rear doors). The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal.

UnlockingwiththeRKEkeyblade

Push the Mechanical Key Release Button (item #1) to expose the RKE key blade, insert the key blade into the driver door exterior lock cylinder and turn the key counterclockwise to unlock the all doors.

Unlocking The Rear Cargo Area From Inside The Vehicle

Pull up on the lock/unlock lever located on the drivers door panel to the 1st detent to unlock all doors from inside the vehicle.

Sliding Side Doors

UnlockingwithanRKEKeyFob

Push and release the CARGO UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob to unlock the sliding side doors. To open one of the sliding side doors, pull the handle out from the bottom, then slide the door towards the rear of the

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23

vehicle until it locks into place and cannot go any further. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal.

UnlockingwiththeRKEkeyblade

Push the Mechanical Key Release Button to expose the RKE key blade, insert the key blade into the driver exterior door lock cylinder and turn the key counterclockwise to unlock all doors.

Closingandlockingfromoutside

Grab the side door handle and push towards the front of the vehicle. Once the side door is secured in the full closed position, reverse either of the unlocking modes above to lock the sliding side doors.

Child Lock System — If Equipped

This system prevents the sliding side doors being opened from the inside.

It can be engaged only with the sliding side door open:

Close-up of a car door panel with a black arrow pointing to a control panel (no text or symbols visible)

ChildLockSystem

24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

ToEngageOrDisengageTheChild-ProtectionDoor LockSystem

1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.

The device remains engaged even if the doors are unlocked remotely.

WARNING!

Avoidtrappinganyoneinavehicleinacollision. Rememberthatthereardoorscanonlybeopened fromtheoutsidewhentheChild-Protectionlocksare engaged(locked).

NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position, roll down the window, and open the door using the outside door handle.

Auto Unlock Doors

This feature unlocks all doors when the driver door is open.

WINDOWS

Power Windows — If Equipped

PowerWindowSwitchPanel

1 - Rear Window Control Buttons - If Equipped
2 - Driver Passenger Window Control Buttons
3 - Passenger(s) Window Lock Button

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25

The control on the left front door panel has UP-DOWN switches that give you fingertip control of all power windows. There is a single opening and closing switch on the front passenger door for passenger window control.

NOTE: The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the power windows to operate for up to three minutes after the ignition is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when either front door is opened.

The window opening mechanism is fitted with a security system (if equipped) that can detect the presence of an obstacle whilst the window is closing; when this happens, the system activates and the movement of the glass is immediately reversed.

If the presence of an object is detected and the system is activated, it may be necessary to perform the reset procedure by fully opening the windows.

26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle,orwith accesstoan unlocked vehicle. Allowingchildrento beinavehicleunattendedisdangerousfora numberofreasons.Achildorotherscouldbe seriouslyorfatallyinjured.Childrenshouldbe warnednottotouchtheparkingbrake,brakepedal orthegearselector.
• DonotleavetheRKEKeyFobinornearthe vehicleorinalocationaccessibletochildren.A childcouldoperatepowerwindows,othercontrols,ormovethevehicle.

Auto-DownFeature

The front window switches are equipped with an Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch for a short period of time, release, and the window will go down automatically.

To stop the Auto-Down motion part way, pull up on the window switch briefly and release.

NOTE: The power window switches remain active for up to three minutes (depending on the accessory delay setting) after the ignition switch has been turned OFF. Opening either of the vehicle's front doors will cancel this feature.

Auto-UpFeature

Lift the window switch to the detent for half a second, release, and the window will go up automatically.

To stop the window from going all the way up during the AUTO-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.

To close the window part way, lift the window switch to the detent for less than half a second and release it when you want the window to stop.

WARNING!

Thereisnoanti-pinchprotectionwhenthewindow isalmostclosed.Besuretoclearallobjectsfromthe windowbeforeclosing.

PowerWindowsSystemInitialization

The power windows may be reset if any of the following occurs:

- On the front doors

• Fuse or battery are disconnected.
• Fuse or battery are disconnected when the window is moving.
• 20 window movements without ever closing the window.

- On the rear doors (in addition to the condition for the front doors)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27

- One door opening movement with the window moving, without ever closing the door.

Proceed as follows for initialization:

1. Completely close the driver's door window, keeping the operating button pushed for at least five seconds after the (upper) end of travel position.
2. Proceed in the same way on the passenger's side door button and on the buttons of rear doors.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs open the front windows together to minimize the buffeting.

28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

SLIDING SIDE DOOR

On Cargo versions, the sliding side door is fitted with a spring-loaded latch that stops the door from opening any further. To lock it, simply push the door as far as it will go; to unlock it, pull forward firmly.

Opening And Closing From Outside The Vehicle

Opening/UnlockingWithAnRKEKeyFob

In the Passenger Vehicle, push and release the UNLOCK button on RKE Key Fob to unlock all doors. In the Cargo Vehicle, push and release the UNLOCK button on RKE Key Fob to unlock the front two doors. Push and release the CARGO UNLOCK button on RKE Key Fob once to unlock the passenger/cargo area (side lateral sliding doors and rear doors). The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal.

UnlockingWithTheRKEKeyBlade

Push the Mechanical Key Release Button to expose the RKE key blade, insert the key blade into the driver door exterior lock cylinder and turn the key counterclockwise to unlock all doors.

Closing/LockingWithAnRKEKeyFob

Push and release the LOCK button on RKE Key Fob to lock all doors. Push and release the CARGO LOCK button on RKE Key Fob once to lock the cargo area (side lateral sliding doors and rear doors). The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the lock signal.

LockingWithTheRKEKeyBlade

Push the Mechanical Key Release Button to expose the RKE key blade, insert the key blade into the driver door exterior lock cylinder and turn the key clockwise to lock all doors.

Opening And Closing From The Inside

Opening:

Pull the interior door handle switch to unlock the door, then pull the handle and slide the door towards the rear of the vehicle until it can go no further.

Closing:

Pull the interior door handle switch to release the door and then push it towards the front of the vehicle.

Child Lock System

This system prevents the sliding side doors being opened from the inside.

It can be engaged only with the sliding side door open:

• Position 1 – engaged (door locked)
• Position 2 – disengaged (door can be opened from inside)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29

The device remains engaged even if the doors are unlocked remotely.

Key Emergency Lock (KEL) Device

The sliding side doors are provided with a device for locking all the doors using the lock in case of a power fault.

The device can be engaged with the sliding side doors open as follows:

• Position 1– device not engaged (doors released)
• Position 2 – device engaged (fit the metal insert of the ignition key in its seat and rotate clockwise), door locked

The device is released and thus the doors can be opened as follows:

Ifthepowerisrestored:

- By remote control.

30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

- Opening a front door by inserting the key into the key pawl.

If the power is not restored:

- Opening the driver side door by key pawl and the other doors (passenger's side and sliding side door) pulling the inner handle.

If the child lock was engaged and the previously described locking procedure was carried out, operating the internal handle will not open the door but will only realign the door lock knob. To open the door, the outside handle must be pulled. The door central locking/unlocking button is not disabled by the engagement of the emergency lock.

DOUBLE REAR SWING DOORS

The rear double swing doors are fitted with a link system that stops them when they have opened to an angle of approximately 90 degrees.

To open them wider to an angle of 180 degrees, push the locking device (one on each side) and simultaneously open the doors.

Using the key pawl on the door, you can do the following:

• For Cargo versions with swing door/cargo doors: centrally unlock the load compartment (sliding side doors + rear swing doors/tailgate), centrally lock all the doors.
• For versions with swing door: local unlocking/locking.

Opening/Closing The First Swing Door From The Outside

To open the door, turn the key in the lock or push the CARGO UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob and then pull the exterior handle to the left. To close the door, turn the key in the lock or push the lock button on the RKE Key Fob.

Emergency Opening Of The First Swing Door From The Inside

From inside the vehicle, use the interior door release mechanism located on the left rear trim panel.

Opening The Second Swing Door

After having opened the first door, pull the handle located on the door face toward the rear of the vehicle.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS

Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems:

• Seat Belt Systems
  • Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints

Important Safety Precautions

Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:

1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

1. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. (Refer to "Child Restraints")
2. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to "Child Restraints") should be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
3. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.

4. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.

5. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.

6. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate.
7. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured.
8. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under "If You Need Assistance."

WARNING!

• Neverplacearear-facingchildrestraintinfrontof anairbag.AdeployingPassengerAdvancedFront AirBagcancausedeathorseriousinjurytoachild 12yearsoryounger,includingachildinarear-facingchildrestraint.
• Onlyusearear-facingchildrestraintinvehicle witharearseat.

Seat Belt Systems

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33

ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.

EnhancedSeatBeltUseReminderSystem (BeltAlert)—IfEquipped

DriverandPassengerBeltAlert

3 BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the AVV/START or MAR/RUN position.

InitialIndication

If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first turned to the AVV/START or MAR/RUN position, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard

34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first turned to the AVV/START or MAR/ RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.

BeltAlertWarningSequence

The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts.

ChangeOfStatus

If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35

BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.

NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.

Lap/ShoulderBelts

All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts.

The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Relyingontheairbagsalonecouldleadtomore severeinjuriesinacollision.Theairbagswork withyourseatbelttorestrainyouproperly.In somecollisions,theairbagswon'tdeployatall. Alwayswearyourseatbelteventhoughyouhave airbags.
• Inacollision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strik the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always besure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
• Itisdangeroustorideinacargoarea,insideor outsideofvehicle.Inacollision,peopleridingin theseareasaremorelikelytobeseriouslyinjured orkilled.

(Continued)

36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!(Continued)

• Donotallowpeopletorideinanyareaofyour vehiclethatisnotequippedwithseatsandseat belts.
• Besureeveryoneinyourvehicleisinaseatand usingaseatbeltproperly.
• Wearingyourseatbeltincorrectlycouldmakeyour injuriesinacollisionmuchworse.Youmight sufferinternalinjuries,oryoucouldevenslideout oftheseatbelt.Followtheseinstructionstowear yourseatbeltsafelyandtokeepyourpassengers safe,too.
• Twopeopleshouldneverbebeltedintoasingle seatbelt.Peoplebeltedtogethercancrashintoone anotherinacollision,hurtingoneanotherbadly. Neverusealap/shoulderbeltoralapbeltformore thanoneperson,nomatterwhattheirsize.

WARNING!(Continued)

• Alapbeltworntoohighcanincreasetheriskof injuryinacollision. Theseatbeltforceswon'tbeat thestronghipandpelvicbones, butacrossyour abdomen. Alwayswearthelappartofyourseat beltaslowaspossibleandkeepitsnug.
• Atwistedseatbeltmaynotprotectyouproperly.In acollision, itcouldevencutintoyou.Besurethe seatbeltisflatagainstyourbody, withouttwists.If youcan'tstraightenaseatbeltinyourvehicle, take ittoyourauthorizeddealerimmediately and have itfixed.
• Aseatbeltthatisbuckledintothewrongbuckle willnotprotectyouproperly. Thelapportioncould ridetoohighonyourbody, possiblycausinginternalinjuries. Alwaysbuckleyourseatbeltintothe bucklenearestyou.

(Continued)

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Aseatbeltthatistooloosewillnotprotectyou properly.Inasuddenstop,youcouldmovetoofar forward,increasingthepossibilityofinjury.Wear yourseatbeltsnugly.
• Aseatbeltthatiswornunderyourarmisdangerous. Yourbodycouldstriketheinsidesurfacesofthe vehicleinacollision,increasingheadandneckinjury. Aseatbeltwornunderthearmcancauseinternal injuries.Ribsaren'tasstrongassshoulderbones.Wear theseatbeltoveryourshouldersothatyourstrongest boneswilltaketheforceinacollision.
• Ashoulderbeltplacedbehindyouwillnotprotect youfrominjuryduringacollision.Youaremore likelytohityourheadinacollisionifyoudonot wearyourshoulderbelt.Thelapandshoulderbelt aremeanttobeusedtogether.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Afrayedortornseatbeltcould dripapartina collisionandleaveyouwithnoprotection. Inspect theseatbeltsystemperiodically, checkingforcuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged partsmust bereplacedimmediately. Donotdisassembleormodify theseatbeltsystem. Seatbeltassembliesmustbe replacedafteracollision.

Lap/ShoulderBeltOperatingInstructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap.

38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Interior view of a car showing driver seat, steering wheel, and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and dashboard with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

PullingOutTheLatchPlateInsertingLatchPlateIntoBuckle

1. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."

2. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

PositioningTheLapBelt

1. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39

1. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.

Lap/ShoulderBeltUntwistingProcedure

Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.

40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

1. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.
2. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.

AdjustableUpperShoulderBeltAnchorage

In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that serves you best.

3D rendered image of a car seatbelt with an arrow pointing to the seat (no text or symbols)

AdjustableAnchorage

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position.

Close-up of a car seatbelt with a downward arrow and number 0226051273, no readable text or symbols on the main subject.

AdjustableAnchorage

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41

NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.

42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE SeatBeltsAndPregnantWomen

Illustration of a woman and a pregnant woman seated in a car, both wearing seatbelt (no text or symbols)

0226075266

PregnantWomenAndSeatBelts

Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.

Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.

SeatBeltPretensioner

The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.

NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.

EnergyManagementFeature

This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.

SwitchableAutomaticLockingRetractor(ALR)

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, refer to "Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt" under the "Child Restraints" section of this manual. The table below defines the type of feature for each seating position.

CommercialVehicle

44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

0226076840

PassengerVehicle

If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant's mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to

retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant's mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."

In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.

Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.

WARNING!

- Neverplacearear-facingchildrestraintinfrontof anairbag.AdeployingPassengerAdvancedFront AirBagcancausedeathorseriousinjurytoachild

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

12yearsoryounger,includingachildinarear-facingchildrestraint.

- Onlyusearear-facingchildrestraintinvehicle witharearseat.

HowToEngageTheAutomaticLockingMode

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.

HowToDisengageTheAutomaticLockingMode

Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45

Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

WARNING!

• Theseatbeltassemblymustbereplacedifthe switchableAutomaticLockingRetractor(ALR)featureoranyotherseatbeltfunctionisnotworking properlywhencheckedaccordingtotheproceduresintheServiceManual.
• Failuretoreplacetheseatbeltassemblycould increasetheriskofinjuryincollisions.
• DonotusetheAutomaticLockingModetorestrain occupantswhoarewearingtheseatbeltorchildren whoareusingboosterseats. Thelockedmodeis onlyusedtoinstallrear-facingorforward-facing childrestraintsthathaveaharnessforrestraining thechild.

46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

AirBagSystemComponents

Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components:

•Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
•Steering Wheel and Column
- Instrument Panel
- Knee Impact Bolsters
- Advanced Front Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
•Front and Side Impact Sensors

• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch

AdvancedFrontAirBags

This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver's Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger's Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words "SRS AIRBAG" or "AIRBAG" are embossed on the air bag covers.

AdvancedFrontAirBagAndKneeImpactBolster Locations

1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47

WARNING!

• Beingtooclosetothesteeringwheelorinstrument panelduringAdvancedFrontAirBagdeployment couldcauseseriousinjury,includingdeath.Air bagsneedroomtoinflate.Sitback,comfortably extendingyourarmstoreachthesteeringwheelor instrumentpanel.
• Neverplacearear-facingchildrestraintinfrontof anairbag.AdeployingPassengerAdvancedFront AirBagcancausedeathorseriousinjurytoachild 12yearsoryounger,includingachildinarear-facingchildrestraint.
• Onlyusearear-facingchildrestraintinvehicle witharearseat.

48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

AdvancedFrontAirBagFeatures

The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors or other system components.

The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions.

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.

WARNING!

• Noobjectsshouldbeplacedoverorneartheair bagontheinstrumentpanelsteeringwheel becauseanysuchobjectscouldcauseharmifthe vehicleisinacollisionsevereenoughtocausethe airbagtoinflate.
• Donotputanythingonoraroundtheairbag coversorattempttoopenthemmanually.Youmay damagetheairbagsandyoucouldbeinjured because the airbagsmaynolongerbefunctional. Theprotective covers for the airbagcushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
• Relyingontheairbagsalonecouldleadtomore severeinjuriesinacollision.Theairbagswork withyourseatbelttorestrainyouproperly.In

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

somecollisions, airbags won't deploy at all. Always we are your seat belt seventh though you have air bags.

AdvancedFrontAirBagOperation

Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.

On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed.

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag.

When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags.

The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.

50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

KneeImpactBolsters

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags.

WARNING!

• Donotdrill, cut, ortamper with the knee impact bolstersinanyway
• Donotmountanyaccessoriestothekneeimpact bolsterssuchasalarmlights, stereos, citizenband radios, etc.

SupplementalDriverKneeAirBag

This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and Advanced Front Air Bags.

SupplementalSideAirBags

Your vehicle is equipped with two types of supplemental Side Air Bags:

1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs): Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are marked with a "SRSAIRBAG" or AIRBAG label sewn into the outboard side of these seats.

SupplementalSeat-MountedSideAirBagLabel

The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.

When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback's trim cover. The inflating SAB

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51

deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

WARNING!

Donotuseaccessoryseatcoversorplaceobjects betweenyouandtheSideAirBags;theperformance couldbeadverselyaffectedand/orobjectscouldbe pushedintoyou,causingseriousinjury.

1. SupplementalSideAirBagInflatableCurtains (SABICs):Locatedabovethesidewindows. Thetrim coveringtheSABICsislabeled "SRSAIRBAG" or "AIRBAG."

52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

SupplementalSideAirBagInflatableCurtain(SABIC) LabelLocation

SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.

The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain side impact events.

WARNING!

• Yourvehicleisequippedwithleftandright SupplementalSideAirBagInflatableCurtains (SABICs).Donotstackluggageorothercargoup highenoughtoblockthedeploymentofthe SABICs. ThetrimcoveringabovethesidewindowswheretheSABICanditsdeploymentpath arelocatedshouldremainfreefromanyobstructions.
• YourvehicleisequippedwithSABICs.Inorderfor theSABICstoworkasintended,donotinstallany accessoryitemsinyourvehiclewhichcouldalter thereof.Donotaddanaftermarketsunrooftoyour vehicle.Donotaddroofracksthatrequirepermanentattachments(boltsorscrews)forinstallation onthevehicleroof.Donotdrillintotheroofofthe vehicleforanyreason.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53

The SABICs and SABs ("Side Air Bags") are designed to activate in certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller ("ORC") determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger

54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced Front Air Bags deploy.

Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.

Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child.

WARNING!

• SideAirBagsneedroomtoinflate.Donotlean againstthedoororwindow.Situprightinthe centeroftheseat.
• BeingtooclosetotheSideAirBagsduringdeploymentcouldcauseyoutobeseverelyinjuredorkilled.
• RelyingontheSideAirBagsalonecouldleadto moresevereinjuriesinacollision.TheSideAir Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won't deployatall.Alwayswearyourseatbelteven thoughyouhaveSideAirBags.

NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.

IfADeploymentOccurs

The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment.

NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur:

- The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven't healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55

- As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer's instructions for cleaning.

Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you.

56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Deployedairbagsandseatbeltpretensionerscannot protectyouinanothercollision.Havetheairbags, seatbeltpretensioners,andtheseatbeltretractor assembliesreplacedbyanauthorizeddealerimmediately.Also,havetheOccupantRestraintController Systemservicedaswell.

NOTE:

• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately.

EnhancedAccidentResponseSystem

In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:

• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the hazard light button is pushed. The hazard lights can be deactivated by pushing the hazard light button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response System.
• Unlock the power door locks.

EnhancedAccidentResponseSystemReset Procedure

In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event, the ignition switch must be changed from ignition AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine.

AirBagWarningLight

The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components.

The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. If the

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

57

ignition switch is in the STOP/OFF/LOCK position the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.

The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.

The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup.

The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.

58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.

NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

WARNING!

IgnoringtheAirBagWarningLightinyourinstrumentpanelcouldmeanyouwon'thavetheairbags toprotectyouinacollision.Ifthelightdoesnotcome onasabulbcheckwhentheignitionisfirstturned on,staysonafteryoustartthevehicle,orifitcomes onasyoudrive,haveanauthorizeddealerservicethe airbagsystemimmediately.

MaintainingYourAirBagSystem

WARNING!

- Modificationstoanypartoftheairbagsystem couldcauseittofailwhenyouneedit.Youcould beinjurediftheairbagsystemisnotthereto protectyou.Donotmodifythecomponentsor

(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59

WARNING!(Continued)

wiring, including adding any kind of badges or sticker to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upperrights side of the instrument panel. Donot modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add after markets sidesteps or running boards.

• Itisdangeroustotrytorepairanypartoftheair bagsystemyourself.Besuretotellanyonewho worksonyourvehiclethatithasanairbagsystem.
• Donotattempttomodifyanypartofyourairbag system. The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bags systems service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, need to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), takethe vehicle to your

WARNING!(Continued)

authorizeddealer.Onlymanufacturerapproved seataccessoriesmaybeused.Ifitisnecessaryto modifytheairbagsystemforpersonswithdisabilities,contactyourauthorizeddealer.

EventDataRecorder(EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

- How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

(Continued)

60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE:EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.

In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Child Restraints

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and children. Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

WARNING!

Inacollision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The forcerequired to holdevenan infantory our lap could become so great that you could no hold the child, nomatter

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

howstrongyouare.Thechildandotherscouldbe badlyinjured.Anychildridinginyourvehicle shouldbeinaproperrestraintforthechild'ssize.

There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner's Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner's Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

61

Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.

NOTE:

• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or call 1-866-732-8243.
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada's website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm

SummaryOfRecommendationsForRestrainingChildrenInVehicles

	ChildSize,Height,WeightOrAgeRecommendedTypeOfChildRestraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint		Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint		Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle's seat belt		Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints	Children 12 years old or younger, who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat	Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63

InfantsAndChildRestraints

Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.

The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat.

WARNING!

- Neverplacearear-facingchildrestraintinfrontof anairbag.AdeployingpassengerAdvancedFront AirBagcancausedeathorseriousinjurytoachild 12yearsoryounger,includingachildinarear-facingchildrestraint.

- Onlyusearear-facingchildrestraintinavehicle witharearseat.

OlderChildrenAndChildRestraints

Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should

64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat.

All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle's seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle's seat cushion while the child's back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.

WARNING!

- Improperinstallationcanleadtofailureofan infantorchildrestraint.Itcouldcomelooseina collision.Thechildcouldbebadlyinjuredor killed.Followthechildrestraintmanufacturer's

WARNING!(Continued)

directionsexactlywhen installinganinfant or childrestraint.

- Afterachildrestraintisinstalledinthevehicle,do notmovethevehicleseatforwardorrearward becauseitcanloosenthechildrestraintattachments.Removethechildrestraintbeforeadjusting thevehicleseatposition.Whenthevehicleseathas beenadjusted,reinstallthechildrestraint.

- When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Don't leave it loose in the vehicle. In sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seat backs and cause serious personal injury.

(Continued)

ChildrenTooLargeForBoosterSeats

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle's seat belt alone:

1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child's knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child's shoulder between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the child's thighs and not their stomach?

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65

1. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

If the answer to any of these questions was "no," then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child's squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.

WARNING!

Neverallowachildtoputtheshoulderbeltunderan armorbehindtheirback.Inacrash,theshoulderbelt willnotprotectachildproperly,whichmayresultin seriousinjuryordeath.Achildmustalwayswear boththelapandshoulderportionsoftheseatbelt correctly.

66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

RecommendationsForAttachingChildRestraints

RestraintType	Combined Weightofthe Child+Child Restraint	Useanyattachmentmethodshownwithan“X”Below
		LATCH-LowerAnchors Only	SeatBeltOnly	LATCH-LowerAnchors+TopTether Anchor	SeatBelt+Top TetherAnchor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint	Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg)	X	X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint	More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg)		X
Forward-Facing Child Restraint	Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg)			X	X
Forward-Facing Child Restraint	More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg)				X

LowerAnchorsAndTethersForChildren(LATCH) RestraintSystem(PassengerVehicle)

Anchor. Tether. LATCH

The next generation of child safety.

022668173

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67

has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle's seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information.

68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE LATCHPositionsForInstallingChildRestraintsIn ThisVehicle

Top-down architectural rendering of a car showing front, rear, and side views with no visible text or symbols

0226076841

LowerAnchor/TopTetherLocations(PassengerVehicle)

• Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position
  • Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

ChildRestraintLATCHPositions

FrequentlyAskedQuestionsAboutInstallingChildRestraintsWithLATCH
What is the weight limit (child's weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint?	65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage systemuntil the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?	No Do not use the seat belt when youuse the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages?	No Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position.

70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

FrequentlyAskedQuestionsAboutInstallingChildRestraintsWithLATCH
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage?	No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?	Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the head restraints be removed?	Yes Second row all positions.

LocatingLATCHAnchorage(PassengerVehicle)

The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71

Interior view of a car showing seat, rear seats, and seatbelt with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

LATCHAnchorage

72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE LocatingTetherAnchorage(PassengerVehicle)

There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat.

Interior view of a car showing rear seats and seatbelt, with a downward arrow indicating a structural change (no text or symbols present)

TetherAnchorageLocations

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.

CenterSeatLATCH:

WARNING!

• DonotinstallachildrestraintinthecenterpositionusingtheLATCHsystem. Thispositionisnot approvedforinstallingchildseatsusingthe LATCHattachments. Youmustusetheseatbelt andtetheranchortoinstallachildseatinthecenter seatingposition.
• Neverusethesameloweranchoragetoattachmore thanonechildrestraint.Pleasereferto"Installing ChildRestraintsUsingtheLATCHLowerAnchorage" in the section "Installing Child Restraints" for typicalinstallationinstructions.

Alwaysfollowthedirectionsofthechildrestraint manufacturerwheninstallingyourchildrestraint.Not allchildrestraintsystemswillbeinstalledasdescribed here.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73

ToinstallaLATCH-compatibleChildRestraint:

If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the section "Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt" to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.

1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.

74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

1. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position.
2. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See the section "Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage" for directions to attach a tether anchor.
3. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
4. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.

HowToStowAnUnusedALRSeatBelt:

When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child's reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them.

WARNING!

• Improperinstallationofachildrestrainttothe LATCHanchoragescanleadtofailureofthere-straint.Thechildcouldbebadlyinjuredorkilled. Followthechildrestraintmanufacturer'sdirections exactlywheninstallinganinfantorchildrestraint.
• Childrestraintanchoragesaredesignedtowith-standonlythoseloadsimposedbycorrectly-fitted childrestraints.Undernocircumstancesaretheyto beusedforadultseatbelts,harnesses,orfor attachingotheritemsorequipmenttothevehicle.

InstallingChildRestraintsUsingtheVehicleSeat Belt(PassengerVehicle)

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.”

76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Lap/ShoulderBeltSystemsForInstallingChild RestraintsInThisVehicle

PassengerVehicle

• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
  • Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

FrequentlyAskedQuestionsAboutInstallingChildRestraintsWithSeatBelts
What is the weight limit (child's weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint?	Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?	Yes Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed?	Yes Second Row: The head restraints may be removed from all positions.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint?	No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor.

78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

InstallingAChildRestraintWithASwitchable AutomaticLockingRetractor(ALR):

1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."

4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat.

5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.

6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79

strap. See the section "Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage" for directions to attach a tether anchor.

1. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

InstallingChildRestraintsUsingTheTopTether Anchorage—PassengerWagonOnly:

WARNING!

Donotattachatetherstrapforarear-facingcarseat toanylocationinfrontofthecarseat,includingthe seatframeoratetheranchorage.Onlyattachthe

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

tetherstrapofarear-facingcarseattothetether anchoragethatisapprovedforthatseatingposition, locatedbehindthetopofthevehicleseat.Seethe section"LowerAnchorsandTethersforCHildren (LATCH)RestraintSystem"forthelocationofapprovedtetheranchoragesinyourvehicle.

1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top

80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

tether anchorage for that seating position, move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available.

1. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint.

2. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.

Interior view of a car showing rear seats, seatbars, and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

TetherStrapMounting

1. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

WARNING!

• Anincorrectlyanchoredtetherstrapcouldleadto increasedheadmotionandpossibleinjurytothe child.Useonlytheanchoragepositiondirectly behindthechildseattosecureachildrestrainttop tetherstrap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rearseat, makes sure the ether strap does not slip into the opening between these at backs as you remove slack in the strap.

InstallingChildRestraintsinCommercialVehicles

This commercial vehicle is not designed for use as a family vehicle and is not intended for carrying children in the front passenger seat(s). Never install rear-facing child restraints in this vehicle. If you must carry a child in

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81

a forward-facing child restraint, the passenger seat should be moved to the full rearward position and the child must be in a proper restraint system based on its age, size and weight. Follow the instructions below to secure the child restraint using the seat belt and tether anchorage.

WARNING!

Rear-facinginfantrestraintsmustneverbesecured inthepassengerseatofavehiclewithapassenger AirBag.Inacollision,apassengerAirBagmay deploycausingsevereinjuryordeathtoinfants ridinginrear-facinginfantrestraints.

82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

InstallingChildRestraintsUsingtheVehicleSeat Belt(CommercialVehicle)

The seat belt in the passenger seating position is equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR). This seat belt is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.”

Top-down architectural rendering of a car showing front, rear, and side views with no visible text or symbols

AutomaticLockingRetractor(ALR)Location
- ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

InstallingAChildRestraintWithASwitchable AutomaticLockingRetractor(ALR):Commercial

1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83

1. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
2. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
3. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See "Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage" for directions to attach a tether anchor.
4. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.

84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

InstallingChildRestraintsUsingTheTopTether Anchorage(CommercialVehicle)

This vehicle is equipped with a tether strap anchorage located behind the front passenger seatback, near the floor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, always secure the top tether strap to the tether anchorage.

1. Look behind the front passenger seat to find the tether anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage.

2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint.

3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

Interior view of a car seatbelt and rearview mirror (no text or symbols visible)

TetherStrapInstallation

0226079257

WARNING!

Anincorrectlyanchoredtetherstrapcouldleadto increasedheadmotionandpossibleinjurytothe

(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85

WARNING!(Continued)

child.Useonlytheanchoragepositiondirectlybehindthechildseattosecureachildrestrainttop tetherstrap.

Transporting Pets

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to "Maintenance Procedures" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle."

CAUTION!

NeveruseNon-DetergentOilorStraightMineralOil intheengineordamagemayresult.

NOTE:A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.

SAFETY TIPS

Transporting Passengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.

WARNING!

• Donotleavechildrenoranimalsinsideparked vehiclesinhotweather.Interiorheatbuild-upmay causeseriousinjuryordeath.
• Itisextremelydangeroustorideinacargoarea, insideoroutsideofvehicle.Inacollision,people ridingintheseareasaremorelikelytobeseriously injuredorkilled.
• Donotallowpeopletorideinanyareaofyour vehiclethatisnotequippedwithseatsandseat belts.
• Besureeveryoneinyourvehicleisinaseatand usingaseatbeltproperly.

Exhaust Gas

WARNING!

Exhaustgasescaninjureorkill. They contain carbon monoxide(CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing(CO), follow the safety tips:

• Donotruntheengineinaclosedgarageorin confinedareasanylongerthanneededtomove yourvehicleinoroutofthearea.
• If you are required to drivewith the trunk/lift gate/reardors open, makes sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch this set at high speed. DONOT usethere circulation mode.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- Ifitisnecessarytositinaparkedvehiclewiththe engineerunning,adjustyourheatingorcooling controlstoforceoutsideairintothevehicle.Setthe blowerathighspeed.

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle

SeatBelts

Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.

AirBagWarningLight

The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while

driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” for further information.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.

FloorMatSafetyInformation

Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89

cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

WARNING!

Pedalsthatcannotmovefreelycancauselossof vehiclecontrolandincreasetheriskofseriouspersonalinjury.

• Alwaysmakesurethatfloormatsareproperly attachedtothefloormatfasteners.
• Neverplaceorinstallfloormatsorotherfloorcoveringsinthevehiclethatcannotbeproperlysecuredtopreventthemfrommovingandinterferingwiththe pedalsortheabilitytocontrolthevehicle.
• Neverputfloormatsorotherfloorcoveringsontop ofalreadyinstalledfloormats.Additionalfloor matsandothercoveringswillreducethesizeofthe pedalareaandinterferewiththepedals.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Checkmountingofmatsonaregularbasis.Always properlyreinstallandsecurefloormatsthathave beenremovedforcleaning.
• Alwaysmakesurethatobjectscannotfallintothe driverfootwellwhilethevehicleismoving.Objectscanbecometrappedunderthebrakepedal andacceleratorpedalcausingalossofvehicle control.
• If required, mountingpostsmustbeproperlyinstalled, if notequipped from the factory. Failuretoproperlyfollowfloormatinstallation or mountingcan cause interference with the brake pedalandaccelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle.

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91

DoorLatches

Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.

FluidLeaks

Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause should be located and corrected immediately.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

■MIRRORS....96

□Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . 9 6

□Outside Mirrors....97

□Manual Folding Door Mirrors....97

□Manual Outside Mirror Adjustment — If Equipped....98

□Power Outside Mirrors — If Equipped ..... 9 9

□Sun Visors....100

■SEATS....100

□Manual Seat Adjustments....101

□Folding Rear Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .103

□Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

□Head Restraints....106

■TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD ..... 1 1 0

■LIGHTS....1 1 3

□Multifunction Lever....1 1 3

□Headlights....1 1 4

□Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . . 1 1 4

□High Beams....1 1 4

□ Flash-To-Pass .....114

94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

□Parking Lights....1 1 5

□Turn Signals....1 1 5

□Lane Change Assist....1 1 5

□Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay....1 1 5

□Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 6

□Map/Dome/Lights....1 1 6

■WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ..... 1 1 7

□Front Windshield Wiper Operation....1 1 8

□Rear Window Wiper/Washer....120

■TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN ...120

■ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL....121

□To Activate....122

□To Set A Desired Speed....122

□To Deactivate....123

□To Resume Speed....123

□To Vary The Speed Setting....123

□To Accelerate For Passing....124

■PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED....125

□ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sensors .....126

□ ParkSense Rear Park Assist Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

□ParkSense Rear Park Assist Failure Indications .129

□Cleaning The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System....129

□ParkSense Rear Park Assist System Usage Precautions....130

■PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED....132
■POWER OUTLETS....134
■CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF EQUIPPED....137
■CUPHOLDER....138
■STORAGE....138
□Glove Compartment....138
□Dash Storage....139
□Overhead Console Storage .....139

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95

■CARGO AREA FEATURES....140

□Rear Cargo Tie-Downs....140

□Rear Cargo Lights....141

□Cargo Compartment Light — If Equipped . . . .143

■REAR WINDOW FEATURES....143

□Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped . . . . . .143

■ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . . 144

96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

MIRRORS

Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped

A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-shield. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.

Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while the small control under the mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).

Close-up of a car front mirror with an arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

AdjustingRearviewMirror

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97

Outside Mirrors

To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.

WARNING!

Vehiclesandotherobjectsseeninthepassengerside convexmirrorwilllooksmallerandfartheraway thantheyreallyare.Relyingtoomuchonyour passengersideconvexmirrorcouldcauseyouto collidewithanothervehicleorotherobject.Useyour insidemirrorwhenjudgingthesizeordistanceofa vehicleseeninthepassengersideconvexmirror. Somevehicleswillnothaveaconvexpassengerside mirror.

Manual Folding Door Mirrors

The door mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to be folded rearward to help avoid damage.

Diagram showing car door seat assembly with a black arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

FoldingMirrors

98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

Itisrecommendedtofoldthemirrorsintothefull rearwardpositiontoresistdamagewhenenteringa carwashoranarrowlocation.

Manual Outside Mirror Adjustment — If Equipped

From the inside of the vehicle, use the control lever to adjust the mirror.

Interior view of a car showing the door, vent, and side window with a black arrow pointing to the handle (no text or symbols)

ManualMirrorControlLever

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99

Power Outside Mirrors — If Equipped

The power mirror controls are located on the mirror flag trim above the driver's door trim panel. To adjust a mirror, turn the control knob toward the left or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand in the direction you want the mirror to move. When you are finished adjusting the mirror, turn the control to the center (neutral) position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror.

PowerMirrorControls

1 — Driver Mirror Select Position
2 — Neutral Position
3 — Passenger Mirror Select Position
4 — Four-Way Mirror Control Switch

100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Sun Visors

The driver and passenger sun visors are located on the headliner, near the front windshield. The sun visor can be rotated downward or up against the door glass. Your vehicle may be equipped with courtesy mirror located on the passenger sun visor.

Close-up of a car seatbelt buckle with directional arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

SunVisor(PassengerSideShown)

"Slide-On-Rod"OfSunVisor

To use the "Slide-On-Rod" feature of the sun visor, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is parallel to the side window, grabbing the sun visor with your left hand pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the desired position.

SEATS

Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle.

WARNING!

- Itisdangeroustorideinacargoarea,insideor outsideofavehicle.Inacollision,peopleridingin theseareasaremorelikelytobeseriouslyinjured orkilled.

(Continued)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101

WARNING!(Continued)

• Donotallowpeopletorideinanyareaofyour vehiclethatisnotequippedwithseatsandseat belts.Inacollision,peopleridingintheseareasare morelikelytobeseriouslyinjuredorkilled.
• Besureeveryoneinyourvehicleisinaseatand usingaseatbeltproperly.

Manual Seat Adjustments

The front driver and passenger seats can be adjusted forward and rearward and if equipped may be reclined and the height and lumbar can be adjusted.

WARNING!

• Adjustingaseatwhiledrivingmaybedangerous. Movingaseatwhiledrivingcouldresultinlossof controlwhichcouldcauseacollisionandserious injuryordeath.
• Seatsshouldbeadjustedbeforefasteningtheseat beltsandwhilethevehicleisparked.Serious injuryordeathcouldresultfromapoorlyadjusted seatbelt.

102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

SeatAdjustments

1 — Forward/Rearward Adjusting Bar
2 — Height Adjustment Lever
3 — Recliner Knob
4 — Lumbar Knob

ForwardAndRearwardAdjustment

The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat, near the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the seat is in the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.

HeightAdjustment—IfEquipped

The height adjusting lever is located on the center outboard side of the seat. Lift up or push down on the front lever to adjust the front of the seat up or down.

ReclinerAdjustment—IfEquipped

The recliner knob is on the rear outboard side of the seat. To recline the seatback, rotate the knob rearward without leaning back. To return the seatback to its normal upright position, lean forward, rotate the knob forward until the seatback is in the upright position.

LumbarSupport—IfEquipped

This feature allows you to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar support. The lumbar control knob is located on the rear upper outboard side of the seatback. Rotate the control forward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired amount of lumbar support.

WARNING!

• Adjustingaseatwhilethevehicleismovingis dangerous. Thesuddenmovementoftheseatcould causeyoutolosecontrol. Theseatbeltmightnotbe adjustedproperlyandyoucouldbeinjured. Adjust theseatonlywhilethevehicleisparked.
• Donotridewiththeseatbackreclinedsothatthe shoulderbeltisnolongerrestingagainstyour chest.Inacollisionyoucouldslideundertheseat beltandbeseriouslyorevenfatallyinjured.Use thereclineronlywhenthevehicleisparked.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103

Folding Rear Seat — If Equipped

To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be folded flat to allow for extended cargo space.

1. Locate the release lever (upper outboard side of seat), and lift it upward until the seatback releases.

Interior view of a car showing the side panel, seat, and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

SeatbackReleaseLever

104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

1. Slowly fold down the seatback.
2. Pull forward on the lower release lever located on the lower outboard side of seat and lift the seat for extended cargo space.

Close-up of a car's seatbelt mechanism with a black arrow indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)

SeatReleaseLever

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and dashboard components with an arrow indicating a specific location (no text or symbols present)

ExtendedCargoSpace

1. Reverse order for original setting.

Heated Seats — If Equipped

On some models, the front driver and passenger seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are located on the lower outboard side of the seat.

Close-up of a car's side panel showing a button and lever mechanism (no text or symbols visible)

HeatedSeatControlButton

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105

Push the button once to turn on the heated seats. The LED on the button turns on when the heated seat is on. Push the button a second time to shut the heating elements off.

NOTE:

• This features is allowed only with ignition key at MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position.
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes.

WARNING!

- Personswhoareunabletofeelpaintotheskin becauseofadvancedage,chronicillness,diabetes, spinalcordinjury,medication,alcoholuse,exhaustionorotherphysicalconditionmustexercisecare whenusingtheseatheater.Itmaycauseburns

(Continued)

106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!(Continued)

evenatlowtemperatures,especiallyifusedfor longperiodsoftime.

- Donotplaceanythingontheseatorseatbackthat insulatesagainstheat,suchasablanketorcushion. Thismaycausetheseatheatertooverheat.Sitting inaseatthathasbeenoverheatedcouldcause seriousburnsduetotheincreasedsurfacetemperatureoftheseat.

Head Restraints

Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.

WARNING!

Theheadrestraintsforalloccupantsmustbepro- erlyinstalledandadjustedpriortooperatingthe vehicleoroccupyingaseat.Headrestraintsshould neverbeadjustedwhilethevehicleisinmotion. Drivingavehiclewiththeheadrestraintsimproperly adjustedorremovedcouldcauseseriousinjuryor deathintheeventofacollision.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107

FrontHeadRestraints

To raise the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located on the base of the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located on the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.

To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go then push the release button and the adjustment button at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.

FrontHeadRestraint

1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button

108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupant so the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment.
• ALLtheheadrestraintsMUSTbereinstalledinthe vehicletoproperlyprotecttheoccupants.Follow there-installationinstructionsabovepriortooperatingthevehicleoroccupyingaseat.

To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then adjust it to the appropriate height.

WARNING!

Alooseheadrestraintthrownforwardinacollision orhardstopcouldcauseseriousinjuryordeathto occupantsofthevehicle.Alwayssecurelystowremovedheadrestraintsinalocationoutsidetheoccupantcompartment.

RearHeadRestraints

The outboard head restraints can be removed by pushing the release buttons, located at the base of the head restraint and pull upward on the whole assembly.

Interior view of a car showing a seatbelt with directional arrows indicating movement or movement (no text or symbols present)

OutboardHeadRestraintReleaseButtons

The center head restraint is adjustable and removable. To raise the head restraint, push and hold the adjustment button, located on the base of the head restraint and pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push and hold the adjustment button, and push downward on the head restraint till the desired height is reached.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109

To remove the head restraint, push the release button and adjustment button while pulling upward on the whole assembly and raise it as far as it can go. To reinstall the headrest, put the headrest posts into the holes while pushing the release button and adjustment button. Then adjust it to the appropriate height.

110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CenterHeadRestraint

1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button

WARNING!

ALLtheheadrestraintsMUSTbereinstalledinthe vehicletoproperlyprotecttheoccupants.Followthe re-installationinstructionsabovepriortooperating thevehicleoroccupyingaseat.

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD

To open the hood, two latches must be released.

1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument panel and in front of the driver's door.

Mechanical component diagram showing a lever mechanism with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111

Front view of a car with a white upward arrow pointing to the grille (no text or symbols on the car itself)

HoodReleaseLeverHoodSafetyLatchLeverLocation

1. Move to the outside of the vehicle, reach into the opening beneath the center of the hood and push up the safety latch lever to release it, before raising the hood.

2. Raise the hood and place the hood prop rod in hood slot to secure the hood in the open position.

112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

Besuretodisengagetherodandsecureitinclose positionbeforeclosingthehood.Damagemayoccur.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a bracket with a black arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols present)

HoodPropRod

0317042788

WARNING!

Besurethehoodisfullylatchedbeforedrivingyour vehicle.Ifthehoodisnotfullylatched,itcouldopen whenthevehicleisinmotionandblockyourvision. Failuretofollowthiswarningcouldresultinserious injuryordeath.

CAUTION!

Topreventpossibledamage, donotslamthehoodto closeit. Lowerhoodtoapproximately12in(30cm) anddropthehoodtoclose. Makesurehoodisfully closedforbothlatches. Neverdrivevehicleunless hoodisfullyclosed, with bothlatchesengaged.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113

LIGHTS

Multifunction Lever

The multifunction lever, located on the left side of the steering wheel, controls the operation of the headlights, high beams, parking lights, passing light and turn signals.

NOTE: The external lights can only be turned on with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

Close-up of a car headlight control lever with directional arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

MultifunctionLever

114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Headlights

Rotate the end of the multifunction lever upward to the first detent for headlight operation.

NOTE: When the headlights are turned on, the

Daytime Running Lights will be deactivated.

Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped

To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRL), rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the Osymbol.

NOTE:

- The low beams and side/tail lights will not be on with DRL. The DRL function may be programmed to be ON or OFF through the Uconnect system screen. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

- If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen radio, this feature can be programmed through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

High Beams

With the low beams activated, pull the multifunction lever towards the steering wheel to turn on the high beams. A high beam symbol will illuminate in the cluster to indicate the high beams are on. Pull the multifunction lever a second time to switch the headlights back to low beam.

Flash-To-Pass

You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is released.

Parking Lights

To turn on the parking lights, remove the key or turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK position and turn on the headlights.

Turn Signals

Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.

NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115

Lane Change Assist

Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash five times then automatically turn off.

Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay

When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for a preset period of time.

Activation

Remove the key or turn the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position, and pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel, within two minutes. Each time the lever is pulled, the activation of the lights will be extended by 30 seconds. The activation of the lights can be extended to a maximum of 210 seconds.

116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Deactivation

Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel and hold it for more than two seconds.

Front Fog Lights — If Equipped

The fog light switch is located on the center stack of the instrument panel, just below the radio. Push the switch once to turn the front fog lights on. Push the switch a second time to turn the front fog lights off.

Map/Dome/Lights

These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the overhead console. Each light is turned on by pushing the corresponding switch.

LeftSwitch

• Push the left switch to the left to turn OFF the auto dome lights. The dome lights will not automatically turn on when a door is opened.
• Push the left switch to the right to turn ON the dome lights.

RightSwitch

• Push the right switch to the left to turn ON the left map light.
• Push the right switch to the right to turn ON the right map light.

Map/DomeLights

1 — Auto/Off 3 — Left Map
2 — Dome 4 — Right Map

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the right side of the steering column.

NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only operate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Front Windshield Wiper Operation

There are five different modes of operation for the front windshield wipers. The windshield wiper lever can be moved in several positions to access these modes.

WindshieldWiperLever

WindshieldWiperOff

This is the normal position of the wiper lever. IntermittentSpeed

Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first detent. The wipers will operate at intermittent speed. When the vehicle's speed increases, the time between the wipes will decrease.

LowSpeed

Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent. The wipers will operate at low speed.

HighSpeed

Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third detent. The wipers will operate at high speed.

ManualHighSpeed/Mist

Push the lever upward from the off position. The wipers will operate at high speed to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. This operation will continue until the lever is released. When the lever is released, the wipers will return to the off position and automatically shut off.

FrontWindshieldWasherOperation

Pull the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the steering wheel to activate the washers. The wipers will activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is released.

CAUTION!

• Turnthewindshieldwipersoffwhendriving throughanautomaticcarwash.Damagetothe windshieldwipersmayresultifthewipercontrol isleftinanypositionotherthanoff.
• Incoldweather, alwaysturnoffthewiperswitch and allowthewiperstoreturntothe "Park" positionbeforeturningofftheengine. If thewiper switch is lefton and the wipersfreezeto the windshield, damagetothewipermotormayoccur when the vehicle is restarted.
• Alwaysremoveanybuildupofsnowthatprevents thewindshieldwiperbladesfromreturningtothe offposition.Ifthewindshieldwipercontrolis turnedoffandthebladescannotreturntotheoff position,damagetothewipermotormayoccur.

120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

RearWindshieldWiperOperation

Rotate the windshield wiper lever center ring upwards to operate the rear window wiper as follows:

• In intermittent mode when the front window wiper is not operating.
• In synchronous mode (at half the speed of the front window wiper) when the front window wiper is operating.
• In continuous mode with reverse engaged.

With the windshield wipers on and reverse gear engaged, rear window wiping will be continuous in the same way.

RearWindshieldWasherOperation

Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward activates the rear window washer. Keep the windshield wiper lever pushed for more than quarter a second to activate the

rear window wiper as well. Releasing the windshield wiper lever will activate the smart washing function, as described for the windshield wipers.

The function stops when the windshield wiper lever is released.

TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control handle is located on the steering column, below the turn signal lever.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and gear, showing three close-up views of the wheel (no text or symbols)

Tilt/TelescopingControlHandle

To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle down. To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position, pull the control handle up until fully engaged.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121

WARNING!

Donotadjustthesteeringcolumnwhiledriving. Adjustingthesteeringcolumnwhiledrivingordrivingwiththesteeringcolumnunlocked,couldcause thedrivertolosecontrolofthevehicle.Failureto followthiswarningmayresultinseriousinjuryor death.

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL

When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).

The Electronic Speed Control buttons is located on the right side of the steering wheel.

122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

ElectronicSpeedControlButtons

NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.

To Activate

Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be turned off when not in use.

WARNING!

LeavingtheElectronicSpeedControlsystemon whennotinuseisdangerous.Youcouldaccidentally setthesystemorcauseittogofasterthanyouwant. Youcouldlosecontrolandhaveanaccident.Always leavethesystemOFFwhenyouarenotusingit.

To Set A Desired Speed

Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed greater than 25 mph, push

the SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.

NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button.

To Deactivate

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CAN button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory. Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory.

To Resume Speed

To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h) up to the maximum speed of 100 mph (160 km/h).

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

123

To Vary The Speed Setting

ToIncreaseSpeed

When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the RES (+) button.

The speed increment is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S.Speed(mph)

• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

MetricSpeed(km/h)

• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

ToDecreaseSpeed

When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.

The speed decrement is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S.Speed(mph)

- Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.

- If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

MetricSpeed(km/h)

• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

To Accelerate For Passing

Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

UsingElectronicSpeedControlOnHills

The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed.

NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.

On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control.

WARNING!

ElectronicSpeedControlcanbedangerouswherethe systemcannotmaintainaconstantspeed.Yourvehiclecouldgotoofastfortheconditions,andyou couldlosecontrolandhaveanaccident.Donotuse ElectronicSpeedControlinheavytrafficoronroads thatarewinding,icy,snow-coveredorslippery.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125

PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED

The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides an audible indication of the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations.

The ParkSense Rear Park Assist is automatically activated when the transmission is placed into REVERSE. As the distance from an obstacle behind the vehicle decreases, the audible alert becomes more frequent.

126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

InteractionWithTrailerTowing

The Rear Park Assist system is automatically deactivated when a trailer equipped by MOPAR is hitched to the vehicle. The system will be automatically activated as soon as the trailer is removed. If it does not happen, turning the key ignition switch to OFF and then to ON again would be needed. In case of a non MOPAR trailer hitches are mounted the sensor deactivation cannot be guaranteed.

ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sensors

The four ParkSense Rear Park Assist sensors, located in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors' field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles, in the horizontal direction, from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 55 in (140 cm) from the center of the rear fascia/bumper and up to 24 in (60 cm) from the corners of the rear fascia/bumper, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.

Side view of a car's front bumper with a black arrow pointing to a small component (no text or symbols visible)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127

ParkSense Rear Park Assist Alerts

If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when REVERSE gear is engaged, an audible alert is activated.

The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses between the tones are directly proportional to the distance from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succession indicate the presence of a very close obstacle. A continuous tone indicates that the obstacle is less than 12 inches (30 cm) away.

RearParkAssistSensorsLocation

If several obstacles are detected, the ParkSense Rear Park Assist system indicates the nearest obstacle.

The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corresponds to the maximum height of an obstacle that would clear the underside of the vehicle during the parking maneuver.

128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System

SIGNALMEANINGINDICATION
ObstacleDistanceAn obstacle	is present within the sensors' field of view	Audiblesignal/dashboard loud-speaker)Sound pulses emitted at a rate that increases as the distance decreases.Emits continuous tone at 12 inches (30 cm).Adjustable volume level program-mable through personal settings in the EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Setup Menu” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
FailureSensor or System failures VisualSignal(instrument panel)		Icon appears on display.Message is displayed on multifunc-tion display (where provided).

While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is not muted.

The audible signal is turned off immediately if the distance increases. The tone cycle remains constant if the distance measured by the inner sensors is constant. If this condition occurs for the external sensors, the signal is turned off after three seconds (stopping warnings during maneuvers parallel to walls).

ParkSense Rear Park Assist Failure Indications

A malfunction of the ParkSense Rear Park Assist sensors or system is indicated, during REVERSE gear engagement, by the instrument panel warning icon.

The warning icon is illuminated and a message is displayed on the multifunction display (if equipped). Refer to "Instrument Cluster Descriptions" in "Understanding Your Instrument

Panel" for further information.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129

The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position. Failures are indicated immediately if they occur when the system is ON.

Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor is in failure condition, the Instrument Cluster Display shall indicate that the ParkSense Rear Park Assist system is unavailable, without reference to the sensor in failure condition. If even a single sensor fails, the entire system must be disabled. The system is turned off automatically.

Cleaning The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System

Clean the ParkSense Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the vapor jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 inches (10 cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.

130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

ParkSense Rear Park Assist System Usage Precautions

NOTE:

• Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of Rear Park Assist.
• Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The Rear Park Assist system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.

- Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, causing a failure indication to be displayed in the instrument cluster.

WARNING!

- Driversmustbecarefulwhenbackingupeven whenusingParkSense.Alwayscheckcarefully behindyourvehicle,lookbehindyou,andbesure tocheckforpedestrians,animals,othervehicles, obstructions,andblindspotsbeforebackingup. Youareresponsibleforsafetyandmustcontinueto payattentiontoyoursurroundings.Failureretodoso canresultinseriousinjuryordeath.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- BeforeusingParkSense,itisstronglyrecommendedthattheballmountandhitchballassemblyisdisconnectedfromthevehiclewhenthe vehicleisnotusedfortowing.Failureretodosocan resultininjuryordamagetovehiclesorobstacles because the hitchballwillbemuchclosertothe obstacle thantherear fasciawhentheloudspeaker soundsthecontinuoustone.Also,thesensors could detect the ballmountandhitchballassembly,dependingonitssizeandshape,givingafalse indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

CAUTION!

- ParkSenseisonlaparkingaidanditisunableto recognizeeveryobstacle, includingsmallobstacles.

CAUTION!(Continued)

Parkingcurbsmightbetemporarilydetectedornot detectedatall.Obstacleslocatedaboveorbelow thesensorswillnotbedetectedwhentheyarein closeproximity.

• The vehicle must bedrivenslowly when using ParkSense inordertobeable to stopintim when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver look so over his /hers shoulder when using ParkSense.

If it's necessary to keep the ball mount and hitch ball assembly mounted for a long period, it is possible to filter out the ball mount and hitch ball assembly presence in sensor field of view. The filtering operation must be performed only by an authorized dealer.

132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the touchscreen display along with a caution note to "check entire surroundings" across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate.

The Camera Delay setting can be set to ON/OFF on the rear camera settings menu. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE and the Camera Delay is turned OFF, the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears on display again.

When the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE, with the delay camera activated ON in the menu screen, the camera image will continue to be displayed up to 10 seconds, unless the speed of the vehicle is greater than 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is in PARK position or the ignition key is in the OFF position.

The display of the camera image can be enabled or disabled through the rear camera setting menu item (Camera ON/OFF).

When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width of the vehicle and will show separate zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle. The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:

ZoneDistancetotherearofthevehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)

WARNING!

Driversmustbecarefulwhenbackingupevenwhen usingtheParkViewRearBackUpCamera.Always checkcarefullybehindyourvehicle,andbesureto checkforpedestrians,animals,othervehicles,obstructions,orblindspotsbeforebackingup.Youare responsibleforthesafetyofyoursurroundingsand mustcontinuetopayattentionwhilebackingup. Failuretodosocanresultinseriousinjuryordeath.

CAUTION!

• To avoid vehicle damage, Park View should only be used as a parking aid. The Park View camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.
• Toavoidvehicledamage,thevehiclemustbedrivenslowlywhenusingParkViewtobeabletostopintimewhenanobstacleisseen.Itisrecommendedthatthedriverlookfrequently over his/hershoulderwhenusingParkView.

134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.

POWER OUTLETS

PassengerCompartmentPowerOutlets

The cigar lighter and the power socket are located in the center console, and both operate with the ignition key in the MAR (ON/RUN) position.

Mechanical component diagram showing a lever mechanism with two directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols present)

PassengerCompartmentPowerOutlets LoadCompartmentPowerOutlet

The Load Compartment Power Outlet is located on the left side of the rear cargo compartment. It operates with the ignition key in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position. The outlet can be used for powering 12 Volt adaptive accessories and recharging communications devices.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135

LoadCompartmentPowerOutletUnderhoodPowerOutletFuseLocations

CAUTION!

Donotconnectdeviceswithpowerhigherthan180W totheoutlet.Usingunsuitableadaptorsmaydamage theoutlet.

1 — #85 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet 12V
2 — #86 Fuse 30A Green IP Power Outlet 12V

136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

InteriorFusePanelPowerOutletFuseLocation

1 — #05 Fuse 15A Blue Second IP Power Outlet 12V

WARNING!

Toavoidseriousinjuryordeath:

• Onlydevicesdesignedforuseinthistypeofoutlet shouldbeinsertedintoany12Voltoutlet.
  • Donottouchwithwethands.
• Closethelidwhennotinuseandwhiledrivingthe vehicle.
• If this outletismishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137

CAUTION!

• Manyaccessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in longenough, the vehicle's battery will discharges sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only uses these intermittently and with greater caution.
• Aftertheuseofhighpowerdrawaccessories,or longperiodsofthevehiclenotbeingstarted(with accessoriesstillpluggedin),thevehiclemustbe drivenasufficientlengthoftimetoallowthe generatortorechargethevehicle'sbattery.

CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF EQUIPPED

A removable ash receiver and cigar lighter are available.

Push the cigar lighter button to activate the cigar lighter when the ignition key is in the MAR (ON/RUN) position.

After a few seconds the button returns to its initial position and the cigar lighter is ready for use.

NOTE: Always check that the cigar lighter has turned itself off.

WARNING!

Thecigarlighterbecomesveryhot.Handleitcarefullyandmakesurechildrendon'ttouchit:riskof fireand/orburning.

138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CUPHOLDER

A cupholder is located in the front and rear of the center console.

STORAGE

Glove Compartment

The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel. Pull on the release handle to open the glove compartment.

NOTE: The glove compartment handle is equipped with a lock. To lock the glove compartment, remove the emergency key from the key fob, insert emergency key into glove compartment handle lock cylinder and turn the key to the lock position and remove the key. Use the reverse sequence to unlock the glove compartment.

Front view of a car's dashboard and side panel (no visible text or symbols)

GloveCompartmentReleaseHandle

Dash Storage

The dash storage is located on the right side of the instrument panel above the glove compartment.

Close-up of a car's front bumper with a black arrow pointing to the grille (no text or symbols visible)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139

Overhead Console Storage

There is additional shelf storage above the front sun visors.

Top-down view of a car's front bumper with a black arrow pointing to the grille (no text or symbols)

DashStorageOverheadConsoleStorageLocation

140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CARGO AREA FEATURES

Rear Cargo Tie-Downs

To make it easier to secure your load, there are hooks (if equipped) fixed to the floor.

Interior view of a vehicle showing layout patterns with arrows indicating movement or movement (no text or symbols present)

RearCargoTie-Downs(CargoVersion)

Interior view of a vehicle showing four directional arrows pointing to specific compartments (no text or symbols present)

RearCargoTie-Downs(PassengerVersion)

WARNING!

- Tohelpprotectagainstpersonalinjury,passengers shouldnotbeseatedintherearcargoarea.Therear cargospaceisintendedforloadcarryingpurposes

(Continued)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141

WARNING!(Continued)

only, not for passengers, whoshoulds it in seats and useseat belts.

• Cargotie-downhooksarenotsafeanchorsfora childseattetherstrap.Inasuddenstoporaccident, ahookcouldpullooseandallowthechildseatto comeloose.Achildcouldbebadlyinjured.Use onlytheanchorsprovidedforchildseattethers.
  Theweightandpositionofcargoandpassengerscan changethevehiclecenterofgravityandvehicle handling.Toavoidlossofcontrolresultinginpersonalinjury,followtheseguidelinesforloadingyour vehicle:
• Donotcarryloadswhichexceedtheloadlimits describedonthelabelattachedtotheleftdooror leftdoorcenterpillar.

WARNING!(Continued)

• Alwaysplacecargoevenlyonthecargofloor.Put heavierobjectsaslowandasfarforwardaspossible.
• Placeasmuchcargoaspossibleinfrontoftherear axle. Toomuchweightorimproperlyplacedweight overorbehindtherearaxlecancausetherearof thevehicletosway.
• Donotpile luggage or cargohigher than the top of these at back. This could impair visibility or become dangerous projectile in as sudden stop or accident.

Rear Cargo Lights

Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear cargo light that can be set to three different positions (On/Left Position, Auto/Center Position, On/Right Position). Using the interior light lens, push the lens to the right or left from

(Continued)

142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

its center position and the light is turned on. Leave the lens in the center position, and the light is turned on and off when the doors are opened or closed.

The light above the sliding door or above the second row seats depending on model can be set to three different positions (Off/Left Position, Auto/Center Position, On/Right Position). Using the interior light lens, push the lens to the right from its center position and the light is turned on. Push the lens to the left and the light is turned off. Leave the lens in the center position, and the light is turned on and off when the doors are opened or closed.

Simple 3D illustration of a rectangular object with a black arrow pointing to its side (no text or symbols)

0314042958

RearCargoLight

NOTE: The light will turn off automatically after 15 minutes.

Cargo Compartment Light — If Equipped

The cargo compartment light comes on automatically when the swing doors are opened and turns off when the doors are closed.

CargoCompartmentLight

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143

REAR WINDOW FEATURES

Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped

The rear window defroster button is located in the center of the instrument panel, below the radio.

Push this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes. To manually shut the defroster off, push the button a second time.

NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements:

• Usecarewhenwashingtheinsideoftherear window.Donotuseabrasivewindowcleanerson theinteriorsurfaceofthewindow.Useasoftcloth andamildwashingsolution,wipingparalleltothe heatingelements.Labelscanbepeeledoffafter soakingwithwarmwater.
• Donotusescrapers, sharpinstruments, or abrasive windowcleanersontheinteriorsurfaceofthe window.
• Keepallobjectsasafedistancefromthewindow.

ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED

The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.

NOTE: If not equipped with crossbars, your authorized dealer can order and install MOPAR crossbars built specifically for this roof rack system.

Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars. The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.

To move the crossbars, loosen the attachments, located at the upper edge of each crossbar, approximately eight turns using the anti-theft wrench provided with the

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145

MOPAR crossbars. Then, move the crossbar to the desired position, keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame. Once the crossbar is in the desired position, retighten the with the wrench to lock the crossbar into position.

NOTE:

• To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not in use, place the front and rear crossbars approximately 24 in (61 cm) apart. Optimal noise reduction can then be achieved by adjusting the front crossbar forward or aft using increments of 1 in (2.5 cm).
• If (or any metallic object) is placed over the satellite radio antenna (if equipped), you may experience interruption of satellite radio reception. For improved satellite radio reception, avoid placing the rear cross-bar over the satellite radio antenna.

WARNING!

Cargomustbesecurelytiedbeforedrivingyour vehicle.Improperlysecuredloadscanflyoffthe vehicle,particularlyathighspeeds,resultinginpersonalinjuryorpropertydamage.Followtheroofrack cautionswhencarryingcargoonyourroofrack.

CAUTION!

- Topreventdamagetotheroofofyourvehicle,do notcarryanyloadsontheroofrackwithoutthe crossbarsinstalled. Theloadshouldbesecuredand placedontopofthecrossbars,notdirectlyonthe roof. Ifitisnecessarytoplacetheloadontheroof, placeablanketorsomeotherprotectionbetween theloadandtheroofsurface.

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

• To avoid damage to other refrack and vehicle, do not exceed the maximum refrack load capacity of 150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Longloadswhichextendoverthewindshield,such aswoodpanelsorsurfboards,orloadswithlarge frontalareashouldbesecuredtoboththefrontand rearofthevehicle.
• Travelatreducedspeedsandturncornerscarefully whencarryinglargeorheavyloadsontheroof rack.Windforces,duetonaturalcausesornearby trucktraffic,canaddsuddenupwardlifttoaload. Thisisespeciallytrueonlargeflatloadsandmay resultindamagetothecargooryourvehicle.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTENTS

■INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES....150

■INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY .....151

□Instrument Cluster Display....152

■WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS .....153

□ Red Telltale Indicator Lights....154

□ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights....166

□Green Telltale Indicator Lights....176

□Blue Telltale Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

■ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC)....179

□Speed Beep....182

□Trip B Data....183

□SetTime....183

□Set Date....184

□Autoclose....185

□ Setting The Units....185

□Language....187

□Buzzer Volume....187

□ Seat Belt Buzzer Volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

□Service....188

148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

□Daytime Running Lights (DRL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
□Exit Menu. 189
□Change Engine Oil Indicator System . . . . . . .189
□Trip Computer....190
□Trip Button....190
□Trip Functions....191
□Values Displayed....191

■CYBERSECURITY....192

■UCONNECT SETTINGS....194

□Buttons On The Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
□Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
□Customer Programmable Features/Personal Settings....196

■UCONNECT RADIOS....204
■IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . .204
■STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF EQUIPPED....205

□Radio Operation....206

■RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .207
□General Information....207
■CLIMATE CONTROLS....208
□Manual Climate Controls....208
■UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS — IF EQUIPPED .....213

□Introducing Uconnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
□Get Started....213
□Radio....215

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149

□Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
□Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
□Phone....217

□Voice Text Reply....218
□Additional Information....219

150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

0401051292

1 — Air Outlet 7 — Upper Dash Storage 13 — Climate Controls
2 — Multifunction Lever (External Lights) 8 — Radio 14 — USB Charger/AUX
3 — Instrument Cluster 9 — Passenger Air Bag 15 — Driver Air Bag
4— Horn 10 — Lower Dash Storage 16 — Uconnect Phone Buttons
5— Electronic Speed Control Switches 11 — Glove compartment 17 — Gear Selector
6—ultifunction Lever (Front/Rear Wiper, Trip Computer) 12 — Switch Bank

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY

InstrumentClusterDisplay

0403077530

152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Instrument Cluster Display

1. Speedometer

- Indicates vehicle speed.

1. Fuel Gauge

- The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.

- The fuel pump arrow symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located.

1. Temperature Gauge

- The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.

- The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather or up mountain grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

WARNING!

Ahotenginecoolingsystemisdangerous.Youor otherscouldbebadlyburnedbysteamorboiling coolant.Youmaywanttocallanauthorizeddealer forserviceifyourvehicleoverheats.Ifyoudecideto lookunderthehoodyyourself,see“MaintainingYour Vehicle”.FollowthewarningsundertheCooling SystemPressureCappagraph.

CAUTION!

Drivingwithahotenginecoolingsystemcould damageyourvehicle.Ifthetemperaturegaugereads "H"pulloverandstopthevehicle.Idlethevehicle withtheairconditionerturnedoffuntilthepointer dropsbackintothenormalrange.Ifthepointer remainsonthe"H",turntheengineoffimmediately andcallanauthorizeddealerforservice.

1. Tachometer

- Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000).

1. Instrument Cluster Display

- When the appropriate conditions exist, this display shows the Instrument Cluster Display messages.

Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator lights switch on in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained in the Owner's Manual, which you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a failure indication.

All active telltales will display first if applicable. The system check menu may appear different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.

154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Red Telltale Indicator Lights

EngineTemperatureWarningLight

RedWarning Light	WhatItMeans
	EngineTemperatureWarningLightThis light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H, a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool or the 4 minutes duration is expired, whichever come first.
[4240]	If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.

EngineOilLevelWarningLight

RedTelltale Light	WhatItMeans
	EngineOilLevelWarningLightThis warning light appears on the panel when the engine oil level falls below the minimum recommended value. Restore the correct engine oil level or contact your authorized dealer for service.

156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

ElectronicThrottleControl(ETC)WarningLight

RedTelltaleLight

WhatItMeans

ElectronicThrottleControl(ETC)WarningLightThis light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be driv-able; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

SeatBeltReminderWarningLight

RedTelltaleLight

WhatItMeans

SeatBeltReminderWarningLightWhen the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver's seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

AirBagWarningLight

RedTelltaleLight

WhatItMeans

AirBagWarningLightThis light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is palaced in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.

OilPressureWarningLight

RedTelltaleLight	WhatItMeans
	OilPressureWarningLightThis light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on.Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

BatteryChargeWarningLight

RedTelltaleLight

WhatItMeans

BatteryChargeWarningLightThis light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related component.If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies.”

DoorOpenIndicatorLight

RedTelltaleLight	WhatItMeans
	DoorOpenIndicatorLightThis indicator will illuminate when one or more door(s) are not fully closed.NOTE:If the vehicle is moving and a door is opened, there will also be a single chime.

Transmission Temperature Warning Light

RedTelltale Light	WhatItMeans
	TransmissionTemperatureWarningLightThis light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with severe usage. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, place the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle speed or apply light foot pressure to increase the engine speed RPM until the Transmission Temperature light turns off.

162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

WARNING!

Ifyoucontinueoperatingthevehiclewhenthe TransmissionTemperatureWarningLightisilluminatedyoucouldcausethefluidtoboilover,comein contactwithhotengineorexhaustcomponentsand causeafire.

CAUTION!

ContinuousdrivingwiththeTransmissionTemperatureWarningLightilluminatedwilleventuallycauseseveretransmissiondamageortransmissionfailure.

TransmissionFaultWarningLight

RedTelltaleLight	WhatItMeans
	TransmissionFaultWarningLightThis light will illuminate (together with a message in the Instrument Cluster Display and a buzzer) to indicate a transmission fault. Contact your authorized dealer if the message remains after restarting the engine.

BrakeWarningLight

RedTelltaleLight

WhatItMeans

BrakeWarningLightThis light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is

indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level.

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.

WARNING!

Drivingvehiclewiththeredbrakelightonis dangerous.Partofthebrakesystemmayhavefailed. Itwilltakelongertostopthevehicle.Youcouldhave acollision.Havethevehiclecheckedimmediately.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the

Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by placing the ignition in the position ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.

NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

Anti-LockBrake(ABS)IndicatorLight

YellowTelltale Light

WhatItMeans

Anti-LockBrake(ABS)IndicatorLightAfter the ignition is turned on, the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) light illuminates to indicate function check at vehicle startup. If the light remains on after startup or comes on and stays on at road speeds, it may indicate that the ABS has detected a malfunction or has become inoperative. The system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes.If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light are on, see an authorized dealer immediately. Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights

LowFuelIndicatorLight

YellowTelltaleLight	WhatItMeans
[2757]	LowFuelIndicatorLightWhen the fuel level reaches approximately 2–6 gal (9–11 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added.

GenericWarningIndicatorLight

YellowTelltale Light	WhatItMeans
	GenericWarningIndicatorLightThe Generic Warning Light will illuminate if any of the following conditions occur: Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Failure, External Light Failure, Parking Sensor Failure, DST System Failure.

GlowPlugIndicatorLight—IfEquipped

YellowTelltaleLight

WhatItMeans

GlowPlugIndicatorLightTo prevent possible engine damage while starting at low temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking and this icon will blink when the ambient temperature is less than -31°F (-35°C) and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an engine block heater has not been used. The message “plug in engine heater” will be displayed in the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is below -25.6°F (-32°C) at the time the engine is shut off as a reminder.To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking and this icon will blink when the ambient temperature is less than -35°C (-31°F) and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an engine block heater has not been used. The message “plug in engine heater” will be displayed in the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is below -32°C (-25.6°F) at the time the engine is shut off as a reminder.

168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

TirePressureMonitoringIndicatorLight

YellowTelltale Light

WhatItMeans

TirePressureMonitoringIndicatorLightThe warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.

IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169

one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for

approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

CAUTION!

TheTPMShasbeenoptimizedfortheoriginal equipmenttiresandwheels.TPMSpressuresand

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

warninghavebeenestablishedforthetiresize equippedonyourvehicle.Undesirablesystemoperationorsensordamagemayresultwhenusingreplacementequipmentthatisnotofthesamesize, type,and/orstyle.Aftermarketwheelscancause sensordamage.Usingaftermarkettiresealantsmay causetheTirePressureMonitoringSystem(TPMS) sensorobecomeinoperable.Afterusinganaftermarkettiresealantitisrecommendedthatyoutake yourvehicletoanauthorizeddealershiptohaveyour sensorfunctionchecked.

VehicleSecurityIndicatorLight

YellowTelltale Light

WhatItMeans

VehicleSecurityIndicatorLightIf during starting, the key code is not correctly recognized, the Vehicle Security Light comes on in the instrument panel. In this case, turn the key to OFF and then to ON/RUN; if it is still locked, try again with the other keys that come with the vehicle. Contact an authorized dealer if you still cannot start the engine.If with the engine running, the warning light comes on, this means that the system is running a self-test (for example for a voltage drop).

172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

EngineCheck/MalfunctionIndicatorLight(MIL)

YellowTelltale Light

WhatItMeans

EngineCheck/MalfunctionIndicatorLight(MIL)The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173

WARNING!

Amalfunctioningcatalyticconverter, as referenced above, can reach high temperature than innormal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in deathor serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.

CAUTION!

ProlongeddrivingwiththeMalfunctionIndicator Light(MIL)oncouldcausedamagetotheengine controlsystem.Italsocouldaffectfueleconomyand driveability.IftheMILisflashing,severecatalytic converterdamageandpowerlosswillsoonoccur. Immediateserviceisrequired.

RearFogLightIndicator—IfEquipped

YellowTelltale Light	WhatItMeans
	RearFogLightIndicatorThis indicator will illuminate when the rear fog lights are on.

174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

ElectronicStabilityControl(ESC)IndicatorLight—IfEquipped

YellowTelltale Light

WhatItMeans

ElectronicStabilityControl(ESC)IndicatorLight—IfEquippedThe “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 MPH (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.

ElectronicStabilityControl(ESC)OFFIndicatorLight—IfEquipped

YellowTelltale Light	WhatItMeans
	ElectronicStabilityControl(ESC)OFFIndicatorLight—IfEquippedThis light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.

176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Green Telltale Indicator Lights

TurnSignalIndicatorLights

GreenTelltale Light

WhatItMeans

TurnSignalIndicatorLightsThe instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).NOTE:A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.

Park/HeadlightONIndicatorLight

GreenTelltaleLight	WhatItMeans
	Park/HeadlightONIndicatorLightThis indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.

FrontFogIndicatorLight—IfEquipped

GreenTelltaleLight	WhatItMeans
	FrontFogIndicatorLight—IfEquippedThis indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.

178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CruiseControlEngagedIndicatorLight—IfEquipped

GreenTelltaleLight	WhatItMeans
	CruiseControlEngagedIndicatorLightThis light will turn on when the cruise control has been set to a certain speed.

Blue Telltale Indicator Lights

HighBeamIndicatorLight

BlueTelltaleLight	WhatItMeans
	HighBeamIndicatorLightThis indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to pass"scenario.

ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC)

The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster.

Top-down view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

0409051298
ElectronicVehicleInformationCenter(EVIC)Display

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179

This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pushing the switches mounted on the instrument panel. The EVIC Menu items consists of the following:

•Speed Beep
- Trip B Data
- Set Time
- Set Date
- Autoclose
- Units
- Language
- Buzzer Volume
- Seat Belt Buzzer
•Service

180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

•Daylights

- Exit Menu

The system allows the driver to select information by pushing the following buttons mounted on the instrument panel to the right of the steering column:

NOTE: If equipped with Uconnect(R) 5.0/5.0N radio, some customer programmable features will display and managed by the Uconnect (R) 5.0/5.0N system. Refer to the radio supplement for further Uconnect (R) 5.0/5.0N information.

EVICControlButtons

- MENUButton

Push and HOLD the MENUbutton for a time longer than 1 second to access/select the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. Push and hold the MENUbutton for two seconds to reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.

- UPArrowButton

Push and release the UParrow button to scroll upward through the main menu and submenus.

- DOWNArrowButton

Push and release the DOWNarrow button to scroll downward through the main menu and submenus.

Dimmer:

With headlights on and without entering in the menu, push the UP △ or DOWN ▽ arrow button to increase or decrease the brightness of the instrument panel, graphics and command buttons.

Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Submenu:

1. Briefly push and release the MENUbutton to display the first submenu option.

2. Push and release the UP button (by single push submenu options.

or DOWNarrow

1. Briefly push and release the MENUbutton to select the displayed submenu option and to open the relevant setup menu.

2. Push and release the UP △ or DOWNarrow button (by single pushes) to select the new setting for this submenu option.

3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to store the new setting and go back to the previously selected submenu option.

4. Push and hold the MENU button to return to the main menu (short hold) or the main screen (longer hold).

182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Speed Beep

This function is used to set a speed limit (MPH or km/h); the driver is alerted when this limit is exceeded.

To set the desired speed limit:

1. Push the MENU button briefly. The display will show the wording (SPEED) and the unit (MPH) or (km/h) previously set.
2. If the function is on, push and release the UP DOWNarrow button to select the required speed limit and then push MENU to confirm.

NOTE: The speed may be set in the range from 20 to 125 MPH (30 to 200 km/h) according to the previously chosen unit (see "Setting The Unit") described below.

The setting will increase/decrease by five units each time theUP △ or DOWNarrow button is pushed. Hold

down the UP △ or DOWNarrow button to automatically increase/decrease the setting rapidly. Complete the adjustment when you approach the desired value.

Push the MENUbutton briefly to return to the menu screen or hold the MENUbutton down to return to the standard screen without storing.

To cancel the setting:

1. Briefly push the MENU button. "ON" will flash in the display.
2. Push the DOWN arrow button. "OFF" will flash in the display
3. Push the MENUbutton briefly to return to the menu screen or hold the MENU button down to return to the standard screen without storing.

Trip B Data

This function can be used to activate (On) or deactivate (Off) the Trip B display (Partial Trip).

Refer to "Trip Computer" in this section for further information.

To switch the function On/Off:

1. Push the MENUbutton briefly. The display will flash On or Off according to the previous setting.

2. Push and release the UP △ or DOWNarrow button to select.

Push the MENUbutton briefly to return to the menu screen or hold the MENUbutton down to return to the standard screen without storing.

Set Time

With this function, it is possible to set the time through two submenus: "Time" and "Mode".

To set the time:

1. Push the MENU button; the display will show the two submenus "Time" and "Mode".

2. Push and release the UP △ or DOWNarrow button to switch between the two submenus.

3. Select the required option and then push MENU.

4. If selecting the "Time" submenu, briefly push MENU, the "hours" will flash on the display.

5. Push and release the UP button to adjust. △ or DOWNarrow

6. Push the MENUbutton; the "minutes" will flash on the display.

7. Push and release the UP button to adjust. △ or DOWNarrow

8. Push the MENU button briefly to return to the menu screen or hold the MENU button down to return to the standard screen without storing.

The setting will increase or decrease by one unit each time the UP △ or DOWNArrow button is pushed. Hold down the button to increase/decrease the setting rapidly and automatically. Complete the adjustment when you approach the desired value.

When you select "Mode", pushing the MENUbutton makes the mode flash on the display.

1. Push UP △ or DOWNarrow button to select "24h" or "12h".

2. When you have made the required settings, push the MENU button briefly to go back to the submenu screen or hold the button down to go back to the main menu screen without saving.

3. Hold the MENUbutton down again to return to the standard screen or to the main menu according to where you are in the menu.

Set Date

With this function, it is possible to set the date.

To adjust the date:

1. Push the MENUbutton; the "year" will flash on the display.
2. Push and release the UP △ or DOWN ▽ arrow button to adjust.
3. Push the MENU button; the "month" will flash on the display.
4. Push and release the UP △ or DOWN ▽ arrow button to adjust.

5. Push the MENUbutton; the "day" will flash on the display.

6. Push and release the UP button to adjust.

△ or DOWNarrow

The setting will increase or decrease by one unit each time the UP △ or DOWNarrow button is pushed. Hold down the UP △ or DOWNarrow button to increase/decrease the setting rapidly and automatically. Complete the adjustment when you approach the desired value.

Push the MENUbutton briefly to return to the menu screen or hold the MENUbutton down to return to the standard screen without storing.

Autoclose

When activated (On), this function locks the doors automatically when the vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).

To activate or deactivate this function:

1. Push the MENUbutton briefly to display a submenu.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

185

1. Push the MENUbutton briefly to make the display flash On or Off according to the previous setting
2. Push the UP △ or DOWNarrow button to select.
3. Push the MENU button briefly to return to the submenu screen or hold the button down to return to the main menu screen without saving.
4. Hold the MENUbutton down again to return to the standard screen or to the main menu according to where you are in the menu.

Setting The Units

With this function, it is possible to set the unit of measurement in three submenus: "Distance", "Consumption" and "Temperature".

To set the required unit of measurement:

1. Push the MENU button to display the three submenus.

186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. Push and release the UP △ or DOWNarrow button to navigate through the three submenus.
2. Select the required option and then push the MENU button.
3. If selecting the "Distance" submenu, briefly push the MENU button and the display will show "mi" or "km" depending on the previous setting.
4. Push and release the UP button to select. △ or DOWNarrow

When you select the “Consumption” submenu: briefly pushing the MENUbutton makes “mpg” or “km/l” appear on the display, depending on the previous setting.

1. If the set distance unit of measurement is "mi" (km) the fuel consumption unit will be displayed in "mpg" (km/l or 1/100 km).

2. Push and release the UP button to select.

or DOWNarrow

When you select the "Temperature" submenu: briefly pushing the MENU button the display will show "°C" or "°F" depending on the previous setting.

1. Push and release the UP button to select.
   or DOWNarrow
2. When you have made the required settings, push the MENUbutton briefly to go back to the submenu screen or hold the MENUbutton down to go back to the main menu screen without saving.
3. Hold the MENUbutton down again to return to the standard screen or to the main menu according to where you are in the menu.

Language

Display messages can be shown in different languages. To set the desired language, proceed as follows:

1. Push the MENUbutton, the previously set language will flash on the display.
2. Push and release the UP △ or DOWNarrow button to select.
3. Push the MENU button to return to the menu screen or hold the MENU button down to return to the standard screen without storing.

Buzzer Volume

With this function, the volume of the acoustic signal which accompanies the display of failure/warning can be adjusted according to 8 levels.

To set the desired volume:

1. Push the MENUbutton, the previously set volume level will flash on the display.
2. Push and release the UP △ or DOWNarrow button to adjust.
3. Push the MENUbutton to return to the menu screen or hold the MENUbutton down to return to the standard screen without storing.

Seat Belt Buzzer Volume

With this function the volume of the acoustic signal which accompanies the display of failure/warning can be adjusted accordingly.

To set the desired volume:

1. Push the MENUbutton, the previously set volume level will flash on the display.

188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. Push and release the UP button to adjust.
   △ or DOWNarrow
2. Push the MENUbutton to return to the menu screen or hold the MENUbutton down to return to the standard screen without storing.

Service

Using this function you can display information about the mileage intervals for vehicle servicing.

To consult the information:

1. Push the MENUbutton, which makes the display show the service interval in mi or km according to the previous setting.
2. Push the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or hold the MENU button down to go back to the standard screen.

NOTE: The "Scheduled Servicing Plan" includes vehicle maintenance at fixed intervals. Refer to "Maintenance Schedules" for further information.

Daytime Running Lights (DRL)

With this function it is possible to turn the daytime running lights on and off.

To activate or deactivate this function:

1. Push the MENU button to display a submenu.
2. Push the MENU button to make the display flash On or Off according to the previous setting.
3. Push and release the UP button to select.
   △ or DOWNarrow
4. Push the MENU button to return to the submenu screen or hold the MENU button down to return to the main menu screen without saving.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189

1. Hold the MENUbutton down again to return to the standard screen or to the main menu according to where you are in the menu.

Exit Menu

This is the last function that closes the cycle of settings listed in the menu screen.

1. Pushing the MENUbutton briefly will return the display to the standard screen without storing.
2. Push the DOWN ▽ arrow button to return to the first menu item on the display.

Change Engine Oil Indicator System

ChangeEngineOil

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Change Engine Oil” message will display in the EVIC display. The engine oil change

indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style.

Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and release the MENUbutton. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly, three times, within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.

190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Trip Computer

The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster. It features a driver-interactive display (displays information such as trip information, range, fuel consumption, average speed, and travel time).

Trip Button

The TRIPbutton, located on the right steering column stalk, can be used to display and to reset the previously described values.

• A short button push displays the different values.
• A long button push resets the system and then starts a new trip.

NewTrip

To reset:

- Push and hold the TRIPbutton to reset the system manually.

• When the "Trip distance" reaches 99999.9 miles or kilometers or when the "Travel time" reaches 999.59 (999 hours and 59 minutes), the system is reset automatically.
• Disconnecting/Reconnecting the battery resets the system.

NOTE: If the reset operation occurs in the presence of the screens concerning Trip A or Trip B, only the information associated with Trip A or Trip B functions will be reset.

StartOfTripProcedure

With the ignition on, push and hold the TRIPbutton for over one second to reset.

ExitTrip

To exit the Trip function, wait until all the values have been displayed or hold the MENU button for longer than one second.

Briefly push and release the MENUbutton to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU(approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing settings.

Trip Functions

Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start of new trip).

"Trip A" can be used to display the figures relating to:

• Range
• Trip distance A
  • Average Economy A
• Instantaneous Economy
  • Average speed A
• Travel time A (driving time)
• Reset Trip A

"Trip B" can be used to display the figures relating to:

• Trip distance B
  • Average Economy B
  • Average speed B
• Travel time B (driving time)
• Reset Trip B

NOTE: "TripB" functions maybe excluded (see "Trip BData"). "Range" and "Instantaneous Economy" cannot be reset. "ResetTripA" and "ResetTripB" may be present.

Values Displayed

Range

This indicates the distance which may be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank, assuming that driving

192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

conditions will not change. The message “----” will appear on the display in the following cases:

• Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km).
- The vehicle is parked for a long time with the engine running.

NOTE: The range depends on several factors: driving style, type of route (freeway, residential, mountain roads, etc.), and conditions of use of the vehicle (load, tire pressure, etc.). Trip planning must take into account the above notes.

DistanceTraveled

This value shows the distance covered since the last reset.

AverageEconomy

This value shows the approximate average consumption since the last reset.

Instantaneous Economy

This indicates the fuel consumption. The value is constantly updated. The message “----” will appear on the display if the vehicle is parked with the engine running.

AverageSpeed

This value shows the vehicle's average speed as a function of the overall time elapsed since the last reset.

TravelTime

This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset.

CYBERSECURITY

Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems and features in your vehicle to function properly.

Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless communications. Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require software updates to improve the usability and performance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems.

The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is installed.

WARNING!

• Itisnotpossibletoknowortopredictallofthe possibleoutcomesifyourvehicle'ssystemsare breached.Itmaybepossiblethatvehiclesystems, includingsafetyrelatedsystems,couldbeim-pairedoralossofvehiclecontrolcouldoccurthat mayresultinanaccidentinvolvingseriousinjury ordeath.
• ONLYInsertmedia(e.g.,USB,SDcard,orCD)into yourvehicleifitcamefromatrustedsource.Media ofunknownorigincouldpossiblycontainmalicioussoftware,andifinstalledinyourvehicle,it mayincreasethepossibilityforvehiclesystemsto bebreached.
• Asalways, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized dealer immediately.

194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE:

• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners should:

- Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software-update to learn about available Uconnect software updates.

- Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g. personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).

Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept information and private communications without your consent. For further information, refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.

UCONNECT SETTINGS

The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the center of the instrument panel that allows you to access and change the customer programmable features. Many features can vary by vehicle.

CAUTION!

DoNOTattachanyobjecttothetouchscreen, doing socanresultindamagetothetouchscreen.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195

Uconnect5.0ButtonsOnTheTouchscreenAndButtons OnTheFaceplate

1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate

Uconnect5.0NButtonsOnTheTouchscreenAnd ButtonsOnTheFaceplate

1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate

196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Buttons On The Faceplate

Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).

Your Uconnect system may also have a Screen Off and Back buttons on the faceplate.

Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate a second time to turn the screen on.

Push the Back button on the faceplate to exit out of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.

Buttons On The Touchscreen

Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect display.

Customer Programmable Features/Personal Settings

Push the Settings button on the faceplate to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display, Clock & Date, Safety & Driving Assistance (if equipped), Lights, Doors & Locks, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup (if equipped), Restore Settings and Clear Personal Data.

NOTE:

• Only one category may be selected at a time.
• The Back arrow will change into a Done button if any changes are made.

When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press and release the preferred setting. Once the setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen or the Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous menu or press the X button on the touchscreen to return to the Main Settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the touchscreen on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings.

Display

After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

- DisplayMode

Press the display mode button to set the display brightness according to day, night or auto condition. In auto mode the display brightness is aligned to that of the instrument panel.

• DisplayBrightnessWithHeadlightsON

This feature allows you to select the display brightness when the headlights are on. Adjust the brightness with the "Up" or "Down" arrow buttons on the touchscreen. Then press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen, or push the back button on the faceplate.

- DisplayBrightnessWiththeHeadlightsOff

This feature allows you to select the display brightness when the headlights are off. Adjust the brightness with the "Up" or "Down" arrow buttons on the touchscreen. Then press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen, or push the back button on the faceplate.

- SetLanguage

This feature allows you to select one of multiple languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Set Language button on the touchscreen, then press

198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

the "Desired Language" button. The button will highlight showing that setting has been selected. Press the arrow back/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

- Units

Press the Units button to select Temperature ( ^ F or ^ C), Distance (mi or km) and Fuel Consumption. If the distance is in mi (miles), miles per gallon (mpg) are set automatically. If the distance is km, km/1 or 1/100km can be selected.

- TouchscreenBeep

This feature allows you to turn on or shut off the sound heard when a button on the touchscreen is pressed. To make your selection, press the "Touchscreen Beep" button on the touchscreen, then choose "Yes" or "No." The button will highlight indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

- DisplayTripB

Press the relevant button to activate/deactivate the displaying of the Trip B on the instrument panel display.

- VoiceResponseLength

This feature allows you to change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response Length, press the Brief or Detailed button on the touchscreen. The button will highlight showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

Units—IfEquipped

Press the Units button to select "US", "Metric" or "Custom". If "Custom" is selected, each unit of measure may be selected independently.

The correct unit for Temperature “°C,” or “°F,” Distance “mi” or “km” and Fuel Consumption.

If the distance is in "mi," "MPG" (US) are set automatically. If the distance is "km", "km/L" or "L/100 km" can be selected.

Clock&Date

After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

- SyncTimeWithGPS—IfEquippedWithNavigation

This feature allows you to automatically have the radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press the "Sync with GPS Time" button on the touchscreen. The button will highlight showing that setting has been selected.

• ShowTimeInStatusBar—IfEquipped

This feature allows you to choose to show the time in the Status bar. To change the Time in Status Bar setting, press the "Show Time in Status Bar" button. The button will highlight showing that setting has been selected.

- TimeandFormat

This feature will allow you to set the time and choose the format to display the time. To make your selection, press the "Up" or "Down" arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours/minutes up or down. To select format press the 12h/24h AM and/or PM button on the touchscreen. The button will highlight showing that setting has been selected. If 24h is selected, the AM/PM buttons on the touchscreen will be greyed out (unavailable). Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or press the "X" button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.

- SetDate

This feature will allow you to set the date manually. Press the Set Date button on the touchscreen and using the "Up" and "Down" arrows, set the date.

200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Safety/Assistance

After pressing the Safety/Assistance button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• ParkViewRearBackUpCamera—IfEquipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Static Guidelines that allows you to see straight grid line overlay over the ParkView Back up camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear view image will display for no more than ten seconds and after the radio screen will appear.

To make your selection, press the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.

• ParkViewBackupCameraDelay—IfEquipped

When this feature is enabled, it will allow the ParkView Backup Camera display to remain on while in drive for up to 10 seconds, or 8 mph (13 km/h).

Lights

After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

•DaytimeRunningLights—IfEquipped

When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running. To make your selection, press the Daytime Running Lights button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.

Doors&Locks

After pressing the "Doors & Locks" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

•AutoDoorLocks

When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). To make your selection, press the "Auto Lock" button on the touchscreen, then choose "Yes" or "No." The button will highlight indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

Audio

After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

•Balance

This feature allows you to adjust the Balance settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows to adjust, or tap the speaker icon to readjust to the center.

• Equalizer

This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “-” or “+” arrow buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the Up and Down arrow buttons on the touchscreen.

NOTE:Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.

- SpeedAdjustedVolume

This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume press the Off, 1, 2 or 3 button on the touchscreen.

- Loudness—IfEquipped

Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To make your selection, press the "Loudness" button on the

202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

touchscreen, then choose "On" or "Off." The button will highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.

•Auto-OnRadio

Press the Auto On Radio button on the touchscreen to set how the radio behaves when the Ignition is switched to On. The options are: ON, Off or Recall Last.

- AUXVolumeOffset

This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input. To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match button on the touchscreen, choose a level from -3 to +3.

- RadioOffDelay

Press the Radio Off Delay to keep the radio On for a preset amount of time after the Ignition is switched Off.

Phone/Bluetooth

After pressing the "Phone/Bluetooth" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

- PairedPhones

This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement.

•PairedAudioSources

This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203

SiriusXMSetup—IfEquipped

After pressing the "SiriusXM Setup" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

- TuneStart

Tune Start begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it's on, except that you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play. To make your selection, press the "Tune Start" button on the touchscreen, select "On" or "Off."

- ChannelSkip

SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selection, press the "Channel Skip" button on the touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen.

- SubscriptionInformation

New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.

Press the "Subscription Info" button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.

Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online.

NOTE:SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.

204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

RestoreSettings—IfEquipped

After pressing the Restore Settings button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

- RestoreSettings

When this feature is selected it will reset the Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings. To restore the settings to their default setting, press the Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking "Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?" select Yes to restore, or Cancel to exit. Once the settings are restored, a pop up appears stating "settings reset to default." Press the okay button on the touchscreen to exit.

UCONNECT RADIOS

For detailed information about your Uconnect radio, refer to your Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement.

IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

The USB Input and Auxiliary Jack is located on the instrument panel below the Climate Controls. This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205

USBInputAndAUXJack

For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement.

STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF EQUIPPED

The remote sound system controls are located on the back surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to access the switches.

1 — USB Input 2 — AUX Audio Jack

iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod and iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features. Please visit Apple's website for software updates.

206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a white arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

RemoteSoundSystemControls(BackViewOfSteering Wheel)

The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push-button in the center. Pushing the top of the switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the switch will decrease the volume.

The button located in the center of the right hand control will switch modes to Radio, AUX or other valid audio sources.

The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push-button in the center. The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in.

The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode.

Radio Operation

Pushing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station.

The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next pre-set station that you have programmed in the radio pre-set buttons.

Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the phone, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect (if equipped).

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CLIMATE CONTROLS

Manual Climate Controls

ManualClimateControl

The Manual Climate controls consist of a series of rotary dials, and three push buttons.

1.TemperatureControl

Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial counter clockwise into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures, while rotating clockwise into the red area indicates warmer temperatures.

2.A/CButton

Push this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is engaged.

MAXA/C

For maximum cooling, use the A/C and recirculation modes at the same time.

ECONOMYMODE

If economy mode is desired, push the A/C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then, move the temperature control to the desired temperature.

3. Recirculation Control

Push this control button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present.

NOTE:

- Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209

• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for maximum defogging.
• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost. If the recirculation button is pressed in Defrost mode, the recirculation LED will blink.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.

4.RearDefrostControl

Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn ON the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is ON. The rear window defroster automatically turns OFF after 20 minutes.

210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

5.ModeControl

Rotate this control to change the system between Modes (Panel, Bi-Level, Floor, Mix, Defrost).

•Panel

Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.

NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.

• Bi-Level

Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.

• Floor

Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

•Mix

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that be extra heat to the windshield. This setting is for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture the windshield.

•Defrost

Air is directed through the windshield and side window demister outlets. Use this mode maximum blower and temperature settings for windshield and side window defrosting.

NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix or Defrost, even if the Air Conditioning (A/C) button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.

6.BlowerControl

Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the "0" (OFF) position. There are four blower speeds.

RearWindow/MirrorDefrosting

Push, and release the rear window defrost button to turn the function on/off.

The activation of the rear defroster is indicated by the rear defrost indicator on the instrument panel. The function is automatically deactivated after 20 minutes.

If equipped, push the rear defrost button to activate defrosting of door mirrors and heated rear window.

NOTE: Do not affix stickers to the inside of the heated rear window over the heating filaments, to avoid damage that might cause them to stop working properly.

AirRecirculation

Press and release the Air Recirculation button, LED indicator On, to enter recirculation mode. It is recommended to turn the internal air recirculation On while standing in traffic or in tunnels to prevent the introduction of polluted air.

Do not use this function for an extended period of time, particularly if there are many passengers on board, to prevent the windows from misting up.

NOTE: Internal air recirculation makes it possible to reach the required heating or cooling conditions more quickly depending on the mode selected. Do not use the internal air recirculation function on rainy/cold days as it would considerably increase the possibility of the windows misting.

212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

AirDistributionSelection

Rotate the Mode Control knob to manually select one of the five possible air distribution settings in the passenger compartment:

Air flow to the front windshield, front side window and front/rear footwell diffusers.

Air flow to the front/rear footwell diffusers. This air distribution allows the passenger compartment to be heated quickly.

Air flow distributed between central and side dashboard vents and front/rear footwell vents.

Air flow to central/side dashboard vents (passenger's body).

Air flow to windshield and side windows.

Selecting the footwell/windshield or only windshield distribution activates the climate control system compressor (LED on A/C button on) and the air recirculation is set to "outside air"(LED on Recirculation Control button off). This logic guarantees optimum visibility at the windows. The user can always set air recirculation and climate control system compressor.

SystemMaintenance

In winter, the climate control system must be turned on at least once a month for about 10 minutes.

Have the system inspected at a Ram dealership before the summer.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213

UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS — IF EQUIPPED

Introducing Uconnect

Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0/5.0N system.

Key Features:

• 5.0" Full Color Touchscreen Display
• Bluetooth With Integrated Voice Control
  •GPS Navigation (If Equipped)

Uconnect5.0/5.0N

Get Started

All you need to control your Uconnect system with your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.

214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice Command from current category.

UconnectVoiceCommand

1 — Push to Mute
2 — Push To Begin Radio or Media functions.
3 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text
4 — Push To End Call

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215

Radio

Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)

Push the VR button (w_2v_R) . After the beep, say...

• Tunetoninety-five-point-five FM
• TunetoSatellite Channel Hits 1

TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, press the VR button and say "Help." The system will provide you with a list of commands.

Uconnect5.0/5.0NRadio

Basic Voice Commands

The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect system.

Push the VR button _ VR . After the beep, say...

- Cancelto stop a current voice session

216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Helpto hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again

Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system's status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.

Uconnect5.0/5.0N

Media

Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (if equipped). Voice operation is only available for connected USB and iPod devices.

Push the VR button 05VR. After the beep, say one of the following commands and follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist.

• Changesourceto Bluetooth
•Changesourceto AUX
• Changesourceto USB
- Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play song Moonlight Sonata; PlaygenreClassical

TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your iPod or USB device. Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre information is displayed.

Uconnect5.0/5.0NMedia

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217

Phone

Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions.

Push the Phone button 📋. After the beep, say one of the following commands...

• CallJohn Smith
  • Dial123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
  • Redial(call previous outgoing phone number)
• Callback(call previous incoming phone number)

TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone button and say "Call," then pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say "CallJohn Smith work."

Uconnect5.0/5.0NPhone

Voice Text Reply

Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push the Phone button 📋 and say Listen.(Must have compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)

1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the Phone button 📋. After the beep, say: "Reply"
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system prompts.

PRE-DEFINEDVOICETEXTREPLYRESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in Traffic. See you later.
No.	Start without me.	I'll be Late.
Okay. Where are you? I will beminutes late.
Call me.	Are you there yet?
I'll call you later.	I need directions.	See you inof minutes.
I'm on my way.	Can't talk right
I'm lost. Thanks. now.

TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incomingtext messages only.

Additional Information

© 2016 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks

and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp, Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered trademarks of Yelp.

Uconnect System Support:

• U.S. residents call 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com
- Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca
• Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
- Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
- Sun., Closed

Uconnect Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241. Please have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you call.

STARTING AND OPERATING

CONTENTS

■STARTING PROCEDURES....225

□Automatic Transmission....225

□Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

☐Extreme Cold Weather (Below -20^ F Or -29^ C). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

□Extended Park Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

□If Engine Fails To Start....227

□After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

■ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .227

■AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION....228

□Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

□Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .230

□ Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission .....230

□Gear Ranges....233

■DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES....240

□Acceleration....240

□Traction....240

■DRIVING THROUGH WATER .....241

□ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

□Shallow Standing Water....241

222 STARTING AND OPERATING

■POWER STEERING....243

□Power Steering Fluid Check....244

☐Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . .247

□Brake Assist System (BAS)....249

□Traction Control System (TCS) .....249

□Hill Start Assist (HSA)....250

□Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .....251

□ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light .....252

□Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) .....255

■TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .....256

□Tire Markings....256

□Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

□Tire Terminology And Definitions .....262

□Tire Loading And Tire Pressure .....263

■TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION .....268

□Tire Pressure....268

□Tire Inflation Pressures .....269

☐Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .271

□Radial Ply Tires....271

□Tire Types....272

□Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

□Spare Tires — If Equipped .....274

STARTING AND OPERATING 223

□Tire Spinning....277
□Tread Wear Indicators .....277
□Life Of Tire....278
□Replacement Tires....279

■TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .....280

■TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS....281

■TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)....282

□System Operation....284

□General Information....287

■FUEL REQUIREMENTS....287

□2.4L Engine .....287

□Reformulated Gasoline....288

□Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends....288
□E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .....289
□MMT In Gasoline....289
□Materials Added To Fuel....290
□Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
□Carbon Monoxide Warnings....291

■ADDING FUEL....292

■VEHICLE LOADING....294

□Vehicle Certification Label .....294

■TRAILER TOWING....297

□Common Towing Definitions .....297

□Towing Tips....307

224 STARTING AND OPERATING

■RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)....309

□Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle....309

□Recreational Towing — Automatic Transmission....310

STARTING PROCEDURES

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.

WARNING!

• Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle,orwith accesstoanunlockedvehicle.
• Allowingchildrentobeinavehicleunattendedis dangerousforanumberofreasons.Achildor otherscouldbeseriouslyorfatallyinjured.Childrenshouldbewarnednottotouchtheparking brake,brakepedalorthetransmissiongearslector.
• DonotleavetheKeyFobinornearthevehicle(or inalocationaccessibletochildren).Achildcould operatepowerwindows,othercontrols,ormove thevehicle.

Automatic Transmission

The gear selector must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting to any driving gear.

NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting out of PARK.

Normal Starting

NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.

Turn the ignition switch to the AVV/ACC (START) position and release it when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the "Normal Starting" procedure.

226 STARTING AND OPERATING

Extreme Cold Weather (Below -20°F Or -29°C)

To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.

To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking when the ambient temperature is less than -31^ ( -35^ ) and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an engine block heater has not been used. The message “plug in engine heater” will be displayed in the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is below -25^ ( -32^ ) at the time the engine is shut off as a reminder.

Extended Park Starting

NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.

1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within ten seconds, cycle the ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait five seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the Extended Park Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat the procedure.

CAUTION!

Topreventdamagetothestarter, donotcrankcontinuously form more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.

If Engine Fails To Start

WARNING!

Neverpourfuelorotherflammableliquidsintothe throttlebodyairinletopeninginanattempttostart thevehicle.Thiscouldresultinaflashfirecausing seriouspersonalinjury.

CAUTION!

- Donotattempttopushortowyourvehicletogetit started. Vehiclesequippedwithanautomatictransmissioncannotbestedthisway.Unburnedfuel couldenterthecatalyticconverterandoncethe enginehasstarted,igniteanddamagetheconverter andvehicle.

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

- Topreventdamagetothestarter, donotcontinuouslycranktheengineformorethan15secondsat atime. Wait10to15secondsbeforetryingagain.

After Starting

The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will decrease as the engine warms up.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED

The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather.

Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.

For ambient temperatures below 0^ F ( -18^ C), the engine block heater is recommended. For ambient temperatures below -20^ F ( -29^ C), the engine block heater is required.

The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood, behind to the driver's side headlamp. Follow the steps below to properly use the engine block heater:

1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the driver's side headlamp).
2. Undo the Velcro strap that secures the heater cord in place.
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the Velcro strap and properly stow away behind the driver's side headlamp.

NOTE:

- The engine block heater cord is a factory installed option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords are available from your authorized MOPAR dealer.

• The engine block heater will require 110 Volts AC and 6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.
• The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.

WARNING!

Remembertodisconnecttheengineblockheater cordbeforedriving.Damagetothe110-115Volt electricalcordcouldcauseelectrocution.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

WARNING!

- It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

yourfootisnotfirmlypressingthebrakepedal, the vehiclecouldacceleratequicklyforwardorinreverse.Youcouldlosecontrolofthevehicleandhit someoneorsomething.Onlyshiftintogearwhen theengineisidlingnormallyandyourfootis firmlypressingthebrakepedal.

- Unintendedmovementofavehiclecouldinjure thoseinornearthevehicle.Aswithallvehicles, youshouldneverexitavehiclewhiletheengineis running.Beforeexitingavehicle, alwaysshiftthe transmissionintoPARK, applytheparkingbrake, turntheengineOFF, andremovetheignitionkey. Oncethekeyisremoved, thetransmissionis lockedinPARK, securingthevehicleagainstunwantedmovement.

WARNING!(Continued)

- Whenleavingthevehicle,alwaysremovetheignitionkeyfromthevehicleandlockthevehicle.

- Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle,orwith accesstoan unlocked vehicle. Allowingchildrento beinavehicleunattendedisdangerousfora numberofreasons.Achildorotherscouldbe seriouslyorfatallyinjured.Childrenshouldbe warnednottotouchtheparkingbrake,brakepedal orthetransmissiongearselector.

- Donotleavetheignitionkeyinornearthevehicle (orinalocationaccessibletochildren).Achild couldoperatepowerwindows,othercontrols,or movethevehicle.

(Continued)

CAUTION!

Damagetothetransmissionmayoccurifthefollowingprecautionsarenotobserved:

• ShiftintooroutofPARKorREVERSEonlyafter thevehiclehascometoacompletestop.
• DonotshiftbetweenPARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, orDRIVEwhentheengineisaboveidlespeed.
• Beforeshiftingintoanygear,makesureyourfoot isfirmlypressingthebrakepedal.

NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK.

Key Ignition Park Interlock

This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the full LOCK/OFF (key removal) position. The key can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the full LOCK/OFF position, and once removed the transmission is locked in PARK.

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the gear selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be turned to the ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.

The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.

Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission

The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both beside the gear selector and in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). To select a gear range, push

the lock button on the gear selector and move the lever rearward or forward. You must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds (refer to "Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System" in this section). Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.

The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles or kilometers.

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears.

The transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the ERS shift control (refer to "Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation" in this section for further information). Moving the gear selector into the ERS (- / +) position (beside the DRIVE position) activates ERS mode and prevents automatic upshifts beyond this gear. In ERS mode, toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) will change the highest available gear.

232 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward) it is probably in the ERS (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position). In ERS mode, the transmission gear limit (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.

Interior view of a car showing the left side of the intake console with a white arrow pointing to the upper section (no text or symbols visible)

GearSelector

Gear Ranges

DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.

NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold.

PARK(P)

This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.

When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on

the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.

WARNING!

• NeverusethePARKpositionasasubstituteforthe parkingbrake.Alwaysapplytheparkingbrake fullywhenparkedtoguardagainstvehiclemovementandpossibleinjuryordamage.
• Yourvehiclecouldmoveandinjureyouandothers ifitisnotinPARK.Checkbytryingtomovethe gearselectoroutofPARKwiththebrakepedal released.MakesurethetransmissionisinPARK beforeleavingthevehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engines speed higher than midlespeed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintendedmovementofavehiclecouldinjure thoseinornearthevehicle.Aswithallvehicles, youshouldneverexitavehiclewhiletheengineis running.Beforeexitingavehicle,alwaysshiftthe transmissionintoPARK,applytheparkingbrake, turntheengineOFF,andremovetheignitionkey. Oncethekeyisremoved,thetransmissionis

WARNING!(Continued)

lockedinPARK,securingthevehicleagainstunwantedmovement.

- Whenleavingthevehicle,alwaysremovetheignitionkeyfromthevehicleandlockthevehicle.

- Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle,orwith accesstoan unlocked vehicle. Allowingchildrento beinavehicleunattendedisdangerousfora numberofreasons.Achildorotherscouldbe seriouslyorfatallyinjured.Childrenshouldbe warnednottotouchtheparkingbrake,brakepedal orthegearselector.

- Donotleavetheignitionkeyinornearthevehicle (orinalocationaccessibletochildren).Achild couldoperatepowerwindows,othercontrols,or movethevehicle.

(Continued)

CAUTION!

• BeforemovingthegearsectoroutofPARK,you mustturntheignitionswitchfromtheLOCK/OFF positiontotheON/RUNposition,andalsopress thebrakepedal.Otherwise,damagethegears selectorcouldresult.
• DONOTracetheenginewhenshifting from PARKorNEUTRALintoanothergearrange, asthis candamagethedrivetrain.

The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:

- When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the gear selector and firmly move the lever all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated.

• Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector will not move out of PARK.

REVERSE(R)

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

NEUTRAL(N)

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine may be started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.

WARNING!

DonotcoastinNEUTRALandneverturnoffthe ignitiontocoastdownahill.Theseareunsafe practicesthatlimityourresponsetochangingtraffic orroadconditions.Youmightlosecontrolofthe vehicleandhaveacollision.

CAUTION!

Towingthevehicle,coasting,ordrivingforanyother reasonwiththetransmissioninNEUTRALcancause severetransmissiondamage.Referto"Recreational Towing"in"StartingAndOperating"and"TowingA DisabledVehicle"in"WhatToDoInEmergencies" forfurtherinformation.

DRIVE(D)

This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.

When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation” in this section for further information) to select a lower gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.

If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the transmission controller may modify the transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating.

If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the "Transmission Temperature Warning Light" may illuminate and the transmission may operate differently until the transmission cools down.

During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter clutch, and shifts into 8th or 9th gear, are inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the

"Note" under "Torque Converter Clutch" in this section). Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.

TransmissionLimpHomeMode

Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.

238 STARTING AND OPERATING

In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation.

NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required.

TorqueConverterClutch

A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.

NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid is warm [usually after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when cold. This is normal. The torque converter clutch will function normally once the transmission is sufficiently warm.

ElectronicRangeSelect(ERS)Operation

The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the driver to limit the highest available gear. For example, if you set the transmission gear limit to 5 (fifth gear), the transmission will not shift above fifth gear, but will shift through the lower gears normally.

You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the DRIVE position, the transmission will operate automatically, shifting between all available gears.

Moving the gear selector to the ERS position (beside DRIVE) will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in the instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, moving the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) will change the top available gear and it will be displayed in the instrument cluster.

To exit ERS mode, simply return the gear selector to the DRIVE position.

WARNING!

Donotdownshiftforadditionalenginebrakingona slipperysurface. Thedrivewheelscouldlosetheir gripandthevehiclecouldskid,causingacollisionor personalinjury.

240 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration (engine braking), move the gear selector into the ERS position, then simply press and hold it forward (-). The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.

DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES

Acceleration

Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front (driving) wheels.

WARNING!

Rapidacceleration on slipperysurfaces is dangerous. Unequaltraction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerates slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud, looses and, etc.).

Traction

When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:

1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy.

2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.

3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.

DRIVING THROUGH WATER

Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.

Flowing/Rising Water

WARNING!

Donotdriveonoracrossaroadorpathwherewater isflowingand/orrising(asinstormrun-off).Flowingwatercanwearawaytheroadorpath'ssurface andcauseyourvehicletosinkintodeeperwater. Furthermore,flowingand/orrisingwatercancarry yourvehicleawaysswiftly.Failureretofollowthis warningmayresultininjuriesthatareseriousor fataltoyou,yourpassengers,andothersaroundyou.

Shallow Standing Water

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions and Warnings before doing so.

WARNING!

• Drivingthroughstandingwaterlimitsyourvehicle'stractioncapabilities.Donotexceed5mph (8km/h)whendrivingthroughstandingwater.
• Drivingthroughstandingwaterlimitsyourvehicle'sbrakingcapabilities,whichincreasesstoppingdistances.Therefore,afterdrivingthroughstandingwater,driveslowlyandlightlypressonthebrakepedalseveraltimestodrythebrakes.
• Failuretofollowthesewarningsmayresultin injuriesthatareseriousorfataltoyou,yourpassengers,andothersaroundyou.

CAUTION!

- Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it. Never drivethrough

CAUTION!(Continued)

standingwaterthatisdeeperthanthebottomof thetirerimsmountedonthevehicle.

• Determinetheconditionoftheroadorthepath thatisunderwaterandifthereareanyobstaclesin thewaybeforedrivingthroughthestandingwater.
• Donotexceed5mph(8km/h)whendriving throughstandingwater.Thiswillminimizewave effects.
• Drivingthroughstandingwatermaycausedamage toyourvehicle'sdrivetraincomponents.Always inspectyourvehicle'sfluids(i.e.,engineoil,transmission,axle,etc.)forsignsofcontamination(i.e., fluidthatismilkyorfoamyinappearance)after drivingthroughstandingwater.Donotcontinueto operatethevehicleifanyfluidappearscontaminated,asthismayresultinfurtherdamage.Such

CAUTION!(Continued)

damageisnotcoveredbytheNewVehicleLimited Warranty.

- Gettingwaterinsideyourvehicle'senginecan causeittolockupandstallout,andcauseserious internaldamagetotheengine.Suchdamageisnot coveredbytheNewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

POWER STEERING

The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost.

If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.

NOTE:

• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any way damage the steering system.

CAUTION!

Prolongedoperationofthesteeringsystemattheend ofthesteeringwheeltravelwillincreasethesteering fluidtemperatureanditshouldbeavoidedwhen possible.Damagetothepowersteeringpumpmay occur.

244 STARTING AND OPERATING

Power Steering Fluid Check

Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required. The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

Donotusechemicalflushesinyourpowersteering systemasthechemicalscandamageyourpower steeringcomponents.Suchdamageisnotcoveredby theNewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

WARNING!

Fluidlevelshouldbecheckedonalevelsurfaceand withtheengineofftopreventinjuryfrommoving partsandtoensureaccuratefluidlevelreading.Do notoverfill.Useonlymanufacturer'srecommended powersteeringfluid.

If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.

PARKING BRAKE

Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK, or manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear.

STARTING AND OPERATING 245

The parking brake lever is located in the center console. To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever completely.

Interior view of a car showing the left side of the seat with a black arrow pointing to the upper side of the seat (no text or symbols visible)

ParkingBrake

When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position, the "Brake Warning Light" in the instrument cluster will illuminate.

NOTE:

• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic transmission is placed in gear, the "Brake Warning Light" will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it

246 STARTING AND OPERATING

difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Whenleavingthevehicle,alwaysremovetheKey Fobfromtheignitionandlockyourvehicle.
• Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle,orwith accesstoanunlockedvehicle.
• Allowingchildrentobeinavehicleunattendedis dangerousforanumberofreasons.Achildor otherscouldbeseriouslyorfatallyinjured.Childrenshouldbewarnednottotouchtheparking brake,brakepedalorthegearsector.

WARNING!(Continued)

• DonotleavetheKeyFobinornearthevehicle, or inalocationaccessibletochildren. Achild could operatepowerwindows, othercontrols, or move thevehicle.
• Besuretheparkingbrakeisfullydisengaged beforedriving;failuretodosocanleadtobrake failureandacollision.
• Alwaysfullyapplytheparkingbrakewhenleavingyourvehicleoritmayrollandcausedamageor injury. Also, becertaintoleaveanautomatictransmissioninPARK, amanualtransmissioninREVERSEorfirstgear. Failuretodosomaycausethe vehicletorollandcausedamageorinjury.

(Continued)

CAUTION!

IftheBrakeSystemWarningLightremainsonwith theparkingbrakereleased,abrakesystemmalfunctionisindicated.Havethebrakesystemservicedby anauthorizeddealerimmediately.

BRAKE SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability, the remaining system will still function. However, there will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake System Warning Light”.

In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e., repeated brake applications with the engine off), the

brakes will still function. However, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating.

Your vehicle is equipped with a advanced electronic brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction Control System (TCS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC.

Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

The Four-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions. The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up and to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.

248 STARTING AND OPERATING

The system's pump motor runs during an ABS stop to provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation, which is normal.

The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light. When the light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning the ignition Off and On again may reset the ABS if the fault detected was only momentary.

WARNING!

- PumpingtheAnti-LockBrakeswilldiminishtheir effectivenessandmayleadtoacollision.Pumping makethestoppingdistancelonger.Justpress firmlyonyourbrakepedalwhenyouneedtoslow downorstop.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent thenaturallawsof physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABScannotpreventcollisions, including those resulting from excessivespeedinturns, following another vehicle to closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in areckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

When you are in a severe braking condition involving the use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the system reverting to the base brake system.

Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise. These occurrences are normal and indicate that the system is functioning properly.

Brake Assist System (BAS)

The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle's braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not "pump" the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.

WARNING!

• The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the naturallawsof physics from acting on the vehicle, nor canitin increasethetraction afforded by prevailing road conditions.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed inturns, driving on very slipper surface, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in areckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

Traction Control System (TCS)

The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping

250 STARTING AND OPERATING

wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for further information.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)

The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes his foot off the brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel.

HSAActivationCriteria

The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate:

• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 5% grade or greater hill.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle in NEUTRAL (manual transmission), vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).

WARNING!

Theremaybesituationsonminorhillswithloaded vehicle,orwhilepullingatrailer,whenthesystem willnotactivateandslightrollingmayoccur.This couldcauseacollisionwithanothervehicleorobject. Alwaysrememberthedriverisresponsibleforbrakingthevehicle.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteering or understeering condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.

When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.

• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position.

WARNING!

- The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent then natural law of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on every slipper surface, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

resultingfromlossofvehiclecontrolduetoinappropriatedriverinputfortheconditions.Onlya safe,attentive,andskillfuldrivercanpreventaccidents.ThecapabilitiesofanESCequippedvehicle mustneverbeexploitedinarecklessordangerous mannerwhichcouldjeopardizetheuser'ssafetyorthesafetyofothers.

- Vehiclemodifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the performance of the ESC system. Changest the steering system, suspension, braking system, tire type and size or wheels is semay adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worntires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle

WARNING!(Continued)

maintenancethatreducetheeffectivenessofthe ESCsystemcanincreasetheriskoflossofvehicle control,vehiclerollover,personalinjuryanddeath.

ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light

The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the MAR (ON/RUN) position for four seconds. If the

ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than

(Continued)

30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.

NOTE:

- The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.

- Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously.

The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially off.

ESCOperatingModes

The ESC system has two available operating modes.

FullOn

This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started the system will be in this mode. This mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off” for specific reasons as noted. Refer to “Partial Off” for additional information.

254 STARTING AND OPERATING

PartialOff

The "ESC OFF" button is located in the switch bank above the climate control. To enter the "Partial Off" mode, momentarily push the "ESC OFF" button and the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the "ESC OFF" button and the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" will turn off. This will restore the normal "ESC On" mode of operation.

ESCOffSwitch

NOTE: To improve the vehicle's traction when driving with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the "Partial Off" mode by momentarily pushing the "ESC OFF" button. Once the situation requiring "Partial Off" mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pushing the "ESC OFF" button. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING!

Whenin"PartialOff" mode, the TCS functionality of ESC (except forthelimited slip feature described in the TCS section) has been disabled and the "ESCOff IndicatorLight" will be illuminated. Whenin "PartialOff" mode, the engine power reduction of TCS is disabled, and then enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)

This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver's steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle's speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers.

ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.

WARNING!

Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions, and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel liftor rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel liftor rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

Tire Markings

1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards 4 — Maximum Load Code (TIN)

2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure

3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and

Temperature Grades

NOTE:

• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter "P" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.

• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter "T" or "S" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

258 STARTING AND OPERATING

TireSizingChart

EXAMPLE:

ExampleSizeDesignation:P215/65R15XL95H,215/65R1596H,LT235/85R16C,T145/80D18103M,31x10.5R15LT

P= Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or"....blank..." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, orLT= Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, orT o r S = Temporary spare tire or31= Overall diameter in inches (in)

215,235,145= Section width in millimeters (mm)

65,85,80= Aspect ratio in percent (%)– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or10.5= Section width in inches (in)

EXAMPLE:

R= Construction code- "R"means radial construction, or- "D"means diagonal or bias construction

15,16,18= Rim diameter in inches (in)

ServiceDescription:

95= Load Index- A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H= Speed Symbol- A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions- The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

EXAMPLE:

LoadIdentification:

Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:

• XL=Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL=Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

MaximumLoad– Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure - Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOTMAL9ABCD0301

DOT= Department of Transportation- This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use

MA= Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9= Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD= Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03= Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)- 03 means the 3rd week

01= Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)- 01 means the year 2001- Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

Tire Terminology And Definitions

TermDefinition
B-PillarThe vehicle B-Pillar	is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
ColdTireInflationPressureCold tire in	flation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
MaximumInflationPressureThe maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
RecommendedColdTireInflation Pressure	Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
TirePlacardA label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle's loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

STARTING AND OPERATING 263

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

TireAndLoadingInformationPlacardLocation

NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door.

Close-up of a car door handle with a black arrow pointing to a component, no visible text or symbols

ExampleTirePlacardLocation(Door)

Interior view of a car showing seat, door, and lock mechanism (no text or symbols)

ExampleTirePlacardLocation(B-Pillar)

264 STARTING AND OPERATING

TireAndLoadingInformationPlacard

811b5a9a

TireAndLoadingInformationPlacard

This placard tells you important information about the:

1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.

2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.

3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.

4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires.

Loading

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard in "Vehicle Loading" in the "Starting And Operating" section of this manual.

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to "Vehicle Loading" in the "Starting And Operating" section of this manual.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.

StepsForDeterminingCorrectLoadLimit—

(1) Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if

“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

MetricExampleForLoadLimit

For example, if "XXX" amount equals 635 kg and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.

266 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:

- If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.

- For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).

B11add11

WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause it re failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Usetires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure:

•Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
- Tread Wear

- Ride Comfort

Safety

WARNING!

• Improperlyinflatedtiresaredangerousandcan causecollisions.
• Underinflationincreasestireflexingandcanresult inoverheatingandtirefailure.
  • Overinflationreducesatire'sabilitytocushion shock.Objectsontheroadandchuckholescan causedamagethatresultintirefailure.
  • Overinflatedorunderinflatedtirescanaffective-vehiclehandlingandcanfailsuddenly,resulting in lossofvehiclecontrol.
• Unequaltirepressurescancausesteeringproblems.Youcouldclosecontrolofyourvehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Unequaltirepressuresfromonesideofthevehicle totheothercancausethevehicletodrifttothe rightorleft.
• Alwaysdrivewitheachtireinflatedtotherecommendedcoldtireinflationpressure.

Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.

NOTE:

• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right.

FuelEconomy

Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.

TreadWear

Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.

RideComfortAndVehicleStability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door.

270 STARTING AND OPERATING

At least once a month:

• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.

CAUTION!

Afterinspectingoradjustingthetirepressure,alwaysreinstallthevalvestemcap.Thiswillprevent moistureanddirtfromenteringthevalvestem, whichcoulddamagethevalvestem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than

1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12^ F ( 7^ C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the Winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68^ F ( 20^ C) and the outside temperature = 32^ F ( 0^ C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12^ F ( 7^ C) for this outside temperature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.

Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

WARNING!

Highspeeddrivingwithyourvehicleundermaxi- mumloadisdangerous.Theaddedstrainonyour tirescouldcausethemtofail.Youcouldhavea seriouscollision.Donotdriveavehicleloadedtothe maximumcapacityatcontinuousspeedsabove 75mph(120km/h).

Radial Ply Tires

WARNING!

Combiningradialplytireswithothertypesoftires onyourvehiclewillcauseyourvehicletohandle poorly.Theinstabilitycouldcauseacollision.Alwaysuseradialplytiresinsetsoffour.Never combinethemwithothertypesoftires.

272 STARTING AND OPERATING

TireRepair

If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria:

• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than a 14 of an inch (6 mm).

Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information.

Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).

Tire Types

AllSeasonTires—IfEquipped

All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

SummerOrThreeSeasonTires—IfEquipped

Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40^ F ( 5^ C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.

Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

WARNING!

DonotuseSummertiresinsnow/iceconditions. You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or death. Driving to fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control.

SnowTires

Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a "mountain/snowflake" symbol on the tire sidewall.

If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

274 STARTING AND OPERATING

While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types.

Run Flat Tires — If Equipped

Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.

It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode.

See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.

Spare Tires — If Equipped

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please refer to the "Tire Service Kit" section located in your Owner's Information kit for further information.

CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance, donottake your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compactor limited - usetemporary spare installed. Damageto the vehicle may result.

SpareTireMatchingOriginalEquippedTireAndWheel—IfEquipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern.

CompactSpareTire—IfEquipped

The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver's side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter "T" or "S" preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

T, S = Temporary Spare Tire

Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.

WARNING!

Compactsparesarefortemporaryemergencyuse only.Withthesespares,donotdrivemorethan 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited treadlife.Whenthetreadisworntothetreadwear indicators,thetemporaryusesparetireneedstobe

(Continued)

276 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!(Continued)

replaced.Besuretofollowthewarnings,which applytoyourspare.Failuretodosocouldresultin spare tirefailureandlossofvehiclecontrol.

FullSizeSpare—IfEquipped

The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

LimitedUseSpare—IfEquipped

The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the

limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

WARNING!

Limitedusesparesareforemergencyuseonly.Installationofthislimitedusesparetireaffectsvehicle handling.Withthistire,donotdrivemorethanthe speedlistedonthelimitusesparewheel.Keep inflatedtothecoldtireinflationpressureslistedon yourTireandLoadingInformationPlacardlocated onthedriver'ssideB-Pillarortherearedgeofthe

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

driver'ssidedoor.Replace(orrepair)theoriginal equipmenttireatthefirstopportunityandreinstallit onyourvehicle.Failurertodosocouldresultinloss ofvehiclecontrol.

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.

Refer to "Freeing A Stuck Vehicle" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.

WARNING!

Fastspinningtirescanbedangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tired damage or failure. Atire could explode and injuresome one. Donot spiny our vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) form more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and donot let any on near aspinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.

278 STARTING AND OPERATING

Close-up of two car tires showing tread pattern and tire tread (no text or symbols)

055007576

TireTread

1—WornTire

2—New Tire

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is

worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to "Replacement Tires" in this section for further information.

Life Of Tire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to:

• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended.

WARNING!

Tiresandthesparetireshouldbereplacedaftersix years,regardlessoftheremainingtread.Failureto followthiswarningcanresultinsuddentirefailure. Youcouldlosecontrolandhaveacollisionresulting inseriousinjuryordeath.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on "Tread Wear Indicator". Refer to the Tire and Loading

Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.

It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle's handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel's specifications match those of the original wheels.

It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.

WARNING!

• Donotuseatire, wheelsizeorratingotherthan thatspecifiedforyourvehicle. Some combinations of unapprovedtiresandwheelsmaychangesuspensiondimensionsandperformancecharacteristics, resultinginchangestosteering, handling, and brakingofyourvehicle. This can cause unpredictablehandlingandstresstosteeringandsuspensioncomponents. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheelsizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Neveruseatirewithasmallerloadindexor capacity,otherthanwhatwasoriginallyequipped onyourvehicle.Usingatirewithasmallerload indexcouldresultintireoverloadingandfailure. Youcouldlosecontrolandhaveacollision.

WARNING!(Continued)

- Failuretoequipyourvehiclewithtireshaving adequatespeedcapabilitycanresultinsuddentire failureandlossofvehiclecontrol.

CAUTION!

Replacingoriginaltireswithtiresofadifferentsizemay resultinfalspeedometerandodometerreadings.

TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)

Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction devices are not recommended.

CAUTION!

Damagetothevehiclemayresultiftirechainsare used.

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 281

TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering, driving, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.

Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.

The suggested rotation method is the "forward cross" shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed.

graph TD
    A["Vehicle Icon"] --> B["Left Vehicle"]
    A --> C["Right Vehicle"]
    B --> D["Left Vehicle"]
    B --> E["Right Vehicle"]
    C --> F["Left Vehicle"]
    C --> G["Right Vehicle"]

TireRotation

282 STARTING AND OPERATING

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold tire pressure.

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to "Tires – General Information" in "Starting And Operating" for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle's tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven, this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold tire pressure on the placard. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be

driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (159 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle's recommended cold tire pressure value.

CAUTION!

• TheTPMShasbeenoptimizedfortheoriginal equipmenttiresandwheels.TPMSpressuresand warningshavebeenestablishedforthetiresize equippedonyourvehicle.Undesirablesystemoperationorsensordamagemayresultwhenusing replacementequipmentthatisnotofthesamesize, type,and/orstyle.Aftermarketwheelscancause sensordamage.Usingaftermarkettiresealantsmay causetheTirePressureMonitoringSystem(TPMS) sensorlobecomeinoperable.Afterusinganaftermarkettiresealantitisrecommendedthatyoutake yourvehicletoanauthorizeddealershiptohave yoursensorfunctionchecked.
• Afterinspectingoradjustingthetirepressure, alwaysreinstallthevalvestemcap.Thiswill preventmoistureanddirtfromenteringthevalve

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.

NOTE:

• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain

correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.

- Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire.

System Operation

This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the instrument cluster.

The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module.

NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly and to maintain the proper pressure.

The TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver Module.
• Five Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors. (If Equipped with Spare Tire)
  •Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.

TirePressureMonitoringLowPressureWarnings

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster, an audible chime will be activated, and a proper text message will be displayed when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure value. The system will

automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.

CheckTPMSWarnings

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected, an audible chime will be activated and a proper text message will be displayed. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors.

286 STARTING AND OPERATING

1. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals.
2. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
3. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
4. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

NOTE: Your vehicle can be equipped with either Tire Service Kit, compact spare tire or regular size spare tire (with or without original TPMS sensor).

1. Tire Service Kit (original tire sealant – if equipped): After fixing the punctured tire with original tire sealant, the original situation will be restored, so system will turn off the telltale during the normal drive.
2. Compact Spare Tire – if equipped: The compact spare wheel is not equipped with TPMS sensor. So when mounted, during the normal drive the system will turn on the telltale (flashing for approximately 75 sec.

then remains solid). This condition persists until a wheel equipped with original TPMS sensor has been mounted on the vehicle.

1. Regular size spare tire (not equipped with TPMS sensor): When mounted, during the normal drive the system will turn on the telltale (flashing for approximately 75 sec. then remains solid). This condition persists until a wheel equipped with original TPMS sensor has been mounted on the vehicle. Then the system will be restored and the telltale will turn off during the normal drive.
2. Regular size spare tire (equipped with TPMS sensor): When mounted, the telltale will turn off during the normal drive.

3. In all the above cases please check the replacement tire inflation pressure before driving your vehicle.

4. In case of tire replacement, if the vehicle is driven for short periods of time, then the system can take a while to be restored.

NOTE: For a correct Tire Pressure Monitoring behavior, please wait for about 20 minutes in key-off during each tire substitution.

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

2.4L Engine

This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide optimum fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded "Regular" gasoline having a posted octane number of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of

higher octane “Premium” gasoline is not required, as it will not provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these engines.

While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower

288 STARTING AND OPERATING

than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.

Reformulated Gasoline

Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved performance and durability of engine and fuel system components.

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as ethanol.

CAUTION!

DONOTusegasolinecontainingmethanolorgasolinecontainingmorethan15%ethanol(E-15).Useof theseblendsmayresultinstartinganddrivability problems,damagecriticalfuelsystemcomponents, causeemissionstoexceedtheapplicablestandard, and/orcausethe"MalfunctionIndicatorLight"to illuminate.Pleaseobservepumplabelsasthey shouldclearlycommunicateifafuelcontainsgreater than15%ethanol(E-15).

Problems that result from using gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system components. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and many void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles

Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:

• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II "Malfunction Indicator Light" on.

• Poor engine performance.

• Poor cold start and cold drivability.

• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.

MMT In Gasoline

Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.

Materials Added To Fuel

Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that have these additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.

Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents to further aide in minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When available, the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.

Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum

and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.

Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!

Followtheseguidelinestomaintainyour vehicle's performance:

• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impaire engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• Anout-of-tuneengineorcertainfuelorignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice apungentburningodor or somelightsmoke, you'renginem maybe outoftune

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

ormalfunctioningandmayrequireimmediateservice.Contactyourauthorizeddealerforservice assistance.

- The useoffueladditives, which are now being sold as octaneenhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuelsystem damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING!

Carbonmonoxide(CO)inexhaustgasesisdeadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:

- Donotinhaleexhaustgases. They contain carbon monoxide, acolorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as agarage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engineer running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running form more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.

- Guardagainstcarbonmonoxidewithpropermaintenance.Havetheexhaustsysteminspected every

(Continued)

292 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!(Continued)

timethevehicleisraised.Haveanyabnormal conditionsrepairedpromptly.Untilrepaired,drive withallsidewindowsfullyopen.

ADDING FUEL

The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.

1. Open the fuel filler door.
2. Remove the fuel cap by rotating it counterclockwise.

FuelFillerCap

1. Fully insert the gasoline nozzle into the filler pipe.
2. Fill the vehicle with fuel.

NOTE: When the fuel nozzle "clicks" or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.

1. Remove gasoline nozzle, reinstall fuel cap and close fuel filler door.

CAUTION!

• Damagetothefuelsystemoremissionscontrol systemcouldresultfromusinganimproperfuel tankfillertubecap.Apoorlyfittingcapcouldlet impuritiesintothefuelsystemandmaycausethe "MalfunctionIndicatorLight(MIL)"toturnon, duetofuelvaporsescapingfromthesystem.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, donot "top off" the fuel tank after filling.

WARNING!

• Neverhaveanysmokingmaterialslitinornearthe vehiclewhenthegascapisremovedorthetankis beingfilled.
• Neveraddfuelwhentheengineisrunning. This is inviolationofmoststateandfederalfireregulationsandmaycausetheMILtoturnon.
• Afiremayresultifgasolineispumpedintoa portablecontainerthatisinsideofavehicle.You couldbeburned.Alwaysplacegascontainerson thegroundwhilefilling.

NOTE:

- When the fuel nozzle "clicks" or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.

294 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a “clicking” sound. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly tightened.
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.

VEHICLE LOADING

As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver's side door or B-Pillar.

If seats are removed for carrying cargo, do not exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR.

Vehicle Certification Label

Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver's door.

The label contains the following information:

• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front

•Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

- Type of Vehicle

• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)

The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.

GrossVehicleWeightRating(GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.

GrossAxleWeightRating(GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR.

WARNING!

Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is important that yououdonotexceed them a maximum front or rear GAWR. Adangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.

TireSize

The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.

RimSize

This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed.

InflationPressure

This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.

CurbWeight

The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added.

Overloading

The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR.

The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR.

Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately. It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles.

Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.

Loading

To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight. Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate.

NOTE: Refer to the "Vehicle Certification Label" affixed to the rear of the driver's door for your vehicle's GVWR and GAWRs.

TRAILER TOWING

In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible.

To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.

Common Towing Definitions

The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information:

GrossVehicleWeightRating(GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. Refer to "Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

GrossTrailerWeight(GTW)

The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation" condition.

The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale.

GrossAxleWeightRating(GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or

298 STARTING AND OPERATING

rear GAWR. Refer to "Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

WARNING!

It is important that you donot exceed them maximum frontorrear GAWR. Adangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded.

TongueWeight(TW)

The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.

FrontalArea

The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.

TrailerSwayControl

The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.

If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC) recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.

Weight-CarryingHitch

A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers.

Weight-DistributingHitch

A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.

WARNING!

• AnimproperlyadjustedWeightDistributingHitch systemmayreducehandling,stability,braking performance,andcouldresultinacollision.
• WeightDistributingSystemsmaynotbecompatiblewithSurgeBrakeCouplers.Consultwithyour hitchandtrailermanufacturerorareputableRecreationalVehicledealerforadditionalinformation.

300 STARTING AND OPERATING

TrailerHitchClassification

The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can

tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.

TrailerHitchClassificationDefinitions
ClassMax.TrailerHitchIndustry	Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4 535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.

TrailerTowingWeights(MaximumTrailerWeight Ratings)

NOTE: For additional trailer towing information (maximum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website addresses:

• ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
  • ramtruck.ca(Canada)
  -rambodybuilder.com

TrailerAndTongueWeight

Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.

Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:

• The tongue weight of the trailer.
- The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.

NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the "Tire And Loading Information" placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.

TowingRequirements

To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recommended.

CAUTION!

• Donottowatraileratallduringthefirst500miles (805km)thenewvehicleisdriven.Theengine,axle orotherpartscouldbedamaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a traileristowed, donot drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and donot make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and other part of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

Perform the maintenance listed in the "Maintenance Schedule". Refer to "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.

WARNING!

Impropertowingcanleadtoacollision.Followthese guidelinestomakeyourtrailertowingassafeas possible:

• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel. When trailering cargothatis not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision.
• Whenhaulingcargoortowingatrailer, donot overloadyourvehicleortrailer. Overloadingcan causealossofcontrol, poorperformanceordamagetobrakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassisstructureortires.
• Safetychainsmustalwaysbeusedbetweenyour vehicleandtrailer.Alwaysconnectthechainsto

WARNING!(Continued)

thehookretainersofthevehiclehitch.Crossthe chainsunderthetrailertongueandallowenough slackforturningcorners.

• Vehicleswithtrailersshouldnotbeparkedona grade.Whenparking,applytheparkingbrakeon thetowvehicle.Putthetowvehicletransmissionin PARK.Forfour-wheeldrivevehicles,makesure thetransfercaseisnotinNEUTRAL.Always,blockor"chock"thetrailerwheels.
  • GCWRmustnotbeexceeded.
• Totalweightmustbedistributedbetweenthetow vehicleandthetrailersuchthatthefollowingfour ratingsarenotexceeded:

1.GVWR

2.GTW

(Continued)

(Continued)

304 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!(Continued)

3.GAWR

1. Tongueweightratingforthetrailerhitchutilized.

TowingRequirements—Tires

• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to "Tires – General Information" in "Starting And Operating" for proper tire inflation procedures.

• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.

• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to "Tires – General Information" in "Starting And Operating" for the proper inspection procedure.

• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.

TowingRequirements—TrailerBrakes

• Do notinterconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically

actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required.

- Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).

WARNING!

• Donotconnecttrailerbrakestoyourvehicle's hydraulicbrakelines.Itcanoverloadyourbrake systemandcauseittofail.Youmightnohave brakeswhenyouneedthemandcouldhavea collision.
• Towinganytrailerwillincreaseyourstopping distance. Whentowingyoushouldallowforadditionalspacebetweenyourvehicleandthevehicleinfrontofyou.Failurertodosocouldresultina collision.

CAUTION!

If the trailer weighsmorethan 1,000 lbs (453 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to this could lead to accelerated brakeling wear, higher brake pedaleffort, and longer stopping distances.

TowingRequirements—TrailerLightsAndWiring

Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety.

The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.

306 STARTING AND OPERATING

TrailerElectricalConnectorLocation

1 — Four-Pin Connector Location
2 — Seven-Pin Connector Location

NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness.

The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the following illustrations.

graph TD
    A["6"] --> B[" "]
    C["5"] --> D[" "]
    E["4"] --> F[" "]
    G["3"] --> H[" "]
    B --> I[" "]
    D --> J[" "]
    F --> K[" "]
    H --> L[" "]
    I --> M["1"]
    J --> N["2"]

057003766

Four-PinConnector

1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn

graph TD
    A["7"] --> B[" "]
    C["1"] --> D[" "]
    E["2"] --> F[" "]
    G["3"] --> H[" "]
    I["4"] --> J[" "]
    K["5"] --> L[" "]
    M["6"] --> N[" "]
    O[" "] --> P[" "]
    Q[" "] --> R[" "]

057003765

Seven-PinConnector

1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes

Towing Tips

Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic.

AutomaticTransmission

The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, use the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control to select a lower gear range.

NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also provide better engine braking.

STARTING AND OPERATING

308 STARTING AND OPERATING

ElectronicRangeSelect(ERS)

• When using the ERS shift control, select the highest gear that allows for adequate performance and avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose "5" if the desired speed can be maintained. Choose "4" or "3" if needed to maintain the desired speed.
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a higher gear range or vehicle speed when grade and road conditions allow.

ElectronicSpeedControl—IfEquipped

• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed.

- Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.

CoolingSystem

To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:

CityDriving

When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.

HighwayDriving

Reduce speed.

AirConditioning

Turn off temporarily.

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

TowingConditionWheelsOF	FtheGroundAutomaticTransmission
Flat Tow NONE NOTALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK
	Rear NOTALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK

NOTE: When recreationally towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.

310 STARTING AND OPERATING

Recreational Towing — Automatic Transmission

Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:

1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the transmission in PARK.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
5. Release the parking brake.

CAUTION!

• DONOTflattowthisvehicle.Damagetothe drivetrainwillresult.Ifthisvehiclerequirestowing,makesurethedrivewheelsareOFFthe ground.
• Towing this vehicle violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from impropertowing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CONTENTS

■HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS....313

■IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS....313

■WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS....314

□Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

■TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED .....316

☐Tire Service Kit Storage — If Equipped .....317

□Tire Service Kit Usage....317

■JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED....321

□Jack Location. .322

□Removing The Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

□Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

□Jacking Instructions....327

□Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers. . . . . . .336

■JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES....337

□Preparations For Jump-Start .....338

□Jump-Starting Procedure....339

■FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE....341

■TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE....343

312 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

■GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE....344
■IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE .....346
■ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS)....347

■EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)....348

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the instrument panel above the climate controls.

Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-

tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.

This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.

NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery.

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.

• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.

NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:

• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a

314 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.

WARNING!

Youorotherscanbebadlyburnedbyhotengine coolant(antifreeze)orsteamfromyourradiator.If youseeorhearsteamcomingfromunderthehood, donotopenthehooduntiltheradiatorhashadtime tocool.Nevertrytoopenacoolingsystempressure capwhentheradiatororcoolantbottleishot.

CAUTION!

Drivingwithahotcoolingsystemcoulddamage yourvehicle.IfthetemperaturegaugereadsHOT (H),pulloverandstopthevehicle.Idlethevehicle withtheairconditionerturnedoffuntilthepointer

CAUTION!(Continued)

dropsbackintothenormalrange.Ifthepointer remainsonHOT(H),andyouhearcontinuous chimes,turntheengineoffimmediatelyandcallfor service.

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench.

(Continued)

Torque Specifications

LugNut/BoltTorque**L	LugNut/ BoltSize	LugNut/ BoltSocket Size
63 Ft-Lbs (86 N·m) SteelWheelsOnly 89 Ft-Lbs (120 N·m) AluminumWheels Only	M12 x 1.25 17	mm

**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.

Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.

Close-up of a car tire wheel with a white arrow pointing to the center bull (no text or symbols)

0605005441
WheelMountingSurface

Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice.

graph TD
    A["①"] --> B["②"]
    B --> C["③"]
    C --> D["④"]
    D --> A

graph TD
    1 --> 2
    2 --> 3
    3 --> 4
    4 --> 5
    5 --> 1

0605006372

TorquePatterns

After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against the wheel.

WARNING!

To avoid the riskofforcing the vehicle off the jack, donottight enthelugnuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.

TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED

Small punctures up to 14 " (6 mm) in the tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C).

This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of 65 mph (106 km/h).

Tire Service Kit Storage — If Equipped

The Tire Service Kit is located under the passenger seat.

Tire Service Kit Usage

If a tire is punctured, you can make a first emergency repair using the Tire Service Kit located under the passenger seat.

Tire punctures of up to 1/4" (6 mm) can be repaired; the kit can be used in all weather conditions. Do not remove the foreign object from the punctured tire, i.e., screw or nail.

Remove the Tire Service Kit from the vehicle, take it out from the bag and place it near the punctured tire. Screw the clear flexible filling tube to the tire valve.

TireServiceKitComponents

1 — Sealant Bottle
2 — Pressure Gauge
3 — Power Plug (located behind storage door)
4 — Power Button
5 — Sealant Hose (Clear)

WARNING!

• Donotattempttosealatireonthesideofthe vehicleclosesttotraffic.Pullfarenoughoffthe roadtoavoidthedangerofbeinghitwhenusing theTireServiceKit.
• DonotuseTireServiceKitordrivethevehicle underthefollowingcircumstances:

- If the puncture in the tiretread is approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.

-Ifthetirehasanysidewalldamage.
-If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure.
-If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire.
-Ifthewheelhasanydamage.
-If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• KeepTireServiceKitawayfromopenflamesor heatsource.
• AlooseTireServiceKitthrownforwardina collisionorhardstopcouldendangertheoccupants ofthevehicle.AlwaysstowtheTireServiceKitin theplaceprovided.Failureretofollowthesewarningscanresultininjuriesthatareseriousorfatalto you,yourpassengers,andothersaroundyou.
  • TakecarenottoallowthecontentsofTireService Kittocomeincontactwithhair,eyes,orclothing. TireServiceKitsealantisharmfulifinhaled, swallowed,orabsorbedthroughtheskin.Itcauses skin,eye,andrespiratoryirritation.Flushimmediatelywithplentyofwaterifthereisanycontact witheyesorskin.Changeclothingassoonas possible,ifthereisanycontactwithclothing.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- TireServiceKitSealantsolutioncontainslatex.In caseofanallergicreactionorrash,consultaphysicianimmediately.KeepTireServiceKitoutof reachofchildren.Ifswallowed,rinsemouthimmediatelywithplentyofwateranddrinkplentyof water.Donotinducevomiting!Consultaphysician immediately.

Insert the power plug into the vehicle power outlet socket. Start the vehicle engine.

Push the Tire Service Kit power button to the "I" position. The electric compressor will be turned on, sealant and air will inflate the tire.

Minimum 26 psi (1.8 bar) of pressure should be reached within 20 minutes. If the pressure has not been reached

turn off and remove the Tire Service Kit, drive the vehicle 30 feet (10 meters) back and forth, to better distribute the sealant inside the tire.

Attach the clear flexible filling tube of the compressor directly to the tire valve and repeat the inflation process.

When the correct pressure has been reached, start driving the vehicle to uniformly distribute the sealant inside the tire. After 10 minutes, stop and check the tire pressure. If the pressure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not drive the vehicle, as the tire is too damaged, contact the nearest Authorized Dealer.

WARNING!

TireServiceKitisnotapermanentflattirerepair. Havethetireinspectedandrepairedorreplacedafter usingTireServiceKit.Donotexceed65mph (110km/h)untilthetireisrepairedorreplaced.

(Continued)

320 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!(Continued)

Failuretofollowthiswarningcanresultininjuries thatareseriousorfataltoyou,yourpassengers,and othersaroundyou.Havethetirecheckedassoonas possibleatanAuthorizedDealer.

If the pressure is at 19 psi (1.3 bar) or above repeat the inflation process to reach the correct tire pressure and continue driving.

Peel off the warning label from the bottle and place it on the dashboard as a reminder to the driver that a tire has been treated with Tire Service Kit.

WARNING!

ThemetalendfittingfromPowerPlugmaygethot afteruse,soitshouldbehandledcarefully.

NOTE:Replace the sealant canister prior to the expiration date at your Authorized Dealer.

0604050423

TireServiceKitExpirationDateLocation

WARNING!

Storethesealantcanisterinitsspecialcompartment, awayfromsourcesofheat.Failuretofollowthis WARNINGmayresultinsealantcanisterrupture andseriousinjuryordeath.

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED

WARNING!

- Donotattempttochangeatireonthesideofthe vehicleclosetomovingtraffic.Pullfarenoughoff theroadtoavoidthedangerofbeinghitwhen operatingthejackorchangingthewheel.

WARNING!(Continued)

- Beingunderajacked-upvehicleisdangerous. The vehiclecouldslipoffthejackandfallonyou. You couldbecrushed. Neverputanypartofyourbody underavehiclethatisonajack. If youneedtoget underaraisedvehicle, takeittoaservicecenter whereitcanberaisedonalift.

- Neverstartorruntheenginewhilethevehicleis onajack.

- Thejackisdesignedtobeusedasatoolfor changingtiresonly.Thejackshouldnotbeusedto liftthevehicleforservicepurposes.Thevehicle shouldbejackedonafirmlevelsurfaceonly. Avoidiceorslipperyareas.

(Continued)

322 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Jack Location

The jack and tools are stowed under the drivers front seat or in the storage compartment (if equipped).

Interior view of a car seatbelt with directional arrow indicating left side (no text or symbols on the main body)

Jack/ToolsLocation

Interior view of a vehicle showing a door, intake manifold, and gear shift (no text or symbols)

Jack/ToolsLocation(StorageCompartment)

Removing The Spare Tire

1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the vehicle. Attach the wrench handle to the winch extension.

1 — Wrench Handle
2 — Winch Extension
3 — Emergency Screwdriver
4 — Bolt Install Wrench
5 — Wheel Chock
6—Jack

1. To access the winch mechanism open the rear doors of the vehicle to expose the winch mechanism access cover. Remove the access cover and install the winch extension into the winch mechanism.

Interior view of a vehicle showing a component with an arrow indicating direction, and a magnified inset highlighting a specific area (no text or symbols present)

WinchLocation

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 323

324 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

JackTools

1 — Winch Extension

2 — Wrench Handle

1. Rotate the wheel wrench handle counterclockwise until the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle.

NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with the winch extension only. Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch.

1. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain access to the spare tire retainer.

Illustration of a car tire being adjusted by a wrench, with a hand adjusting the tire (no text or symbols present)

SpareTire

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 325

1. Remove the retainer nut prior to removing the retainer from the wheel.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a tire with a mounted component and a black arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

RetainerNutLiftingSpareTire

1. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of the cable.

Illustration of hands cleaning a large tire with a tool (no text or symbols visible)

0605008573

326 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

1. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel.

Close-up of a hand using a tool to adjust or inspect a car wheel rim (no text or symbols visible)

Retainer

Preparations For Jacking

1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery areas.

WARNING!

Donotattempttochangeatireonthesideofthe vehicleclosetomovingtraffic,pullfarenoughoff theroadtoavoidbeinghitwhenoperatingthejack orchangingthewheel.

1. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Place the gear selector into PARK.

4. Turn the ignition off to the LOCK position.

5. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, chock the left rear wheel.

NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.

Jacking Instructions

WARNING!

Carefully follow the set of these retire changing warning to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

- Alwaysparkonafirm, levelsurfaceasfarfromthe edgeoftheroadwayaspossiblebeforeraisingthe vehicle.

WARNING!(Continued)

• TurnontheHazardWarningflasher.
- Blockthewheeldiagonallyoppositethewheelto beraised.
- Settheparkingbrakefirmlyandsetanautomatic transmissioninPARK;amanualtransmissionin REVERSE.
- Neverstartorruntheenginewiththevehicleona jack.
- Donotletanyonesitinthevehiclewhenitisona jack.
- Donotgetunderthevehiclewhenitisonajack. If youneedtogetunderaraisedvehicle, takeittoa servicecenterwhereitcanberaisedonalift.
- Onlyusethejackinthepositionsindicatedandfor liftingthisvehicleduringatirechange.

(Continued)

(Continued)

328 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!(Continued)

• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motortraffic.
• Toassurethatsparetires,flatorinflated,are securelystowed,sparesmustbestowedwiththe valvestemfacingtheground.

i

0606052844

JackWarningLabel

CAUTION!

Donotattempttoraisethevehiclebyjackingon locationsotherthanthoseindicatedintheJacking Instructionsforthisvehicle.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 329

Diagram of a van with two views of the suspension system, showing structural components and engine assembly (no text or labels)

JackingLocations

1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug bolts with the wrench handle by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
2. There are two jack engagement locations on each side of the vehicle body.

NOTE: Place the jack underneath the jack engagement location that is closest to the flat tire.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a clamp tool inserted into a bracket with an inset close-up of the component (no text or symbols)

JackEngagedToBodyFlange

330 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Close-up of a car's wheel and side panel assembly with a black arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols visible)

Close-up of an aircraft fuselage showing wheel, suspension, and internal components (no text or symbols visible)

FrontJackingLocationRearJackingLocation

WARNING!

Beingunderajacked-upvehicleisdangerous.The vehiclecouldslipoffthejackandfallonyou.You couldbecrushed.Nevergetanypartofyourbody

(Continued)

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 331

WARNING!(Continued)

underavehiclethatisonajack. If you needed to get underaraised vehicle, take it to as service center where it can be raised on alift.

CAUTION!

Donotattempttoraisethevehiclebyjackingon locationsotherthanthoseindicated.

1. Turn the handle on the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly engaged in the described location. Donotraisethevehicleuntilyouaresurethe jackissecurelyengaged.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a car's suspension system with a black arrow pointing to the wheel (no text or symbols present)

FrontJackingLocationEngaged

0313059099

332 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a car suspension system with a wheel and attached suspension bracket (no text or symbols)

0313059098

RearJackingLocationEngaged

1. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.

WARNING!

Raisingthevehiclehigherthannecessarycanmake thevehiclelessstable.Itcouldslipoffthejackand hurtsomeonearit.Raisethevehicleonlyenough toremovethetire.

1. Remove the wheel lug bolts. For vehicles with wheel covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do not pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub.
2. Install the spare tire. Lightly tighten the wheel lug bolts using the bolt install wrench.

CAUTION!

Besuretomountthesparetirewiththevalvestem facingoutward. Thevehiclecouldbedamagedifthe sparetireismountedincorrectly.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 333

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a hand pressing a car tire with a black arrow indicating the wheel (no text or symbols present)

MountingSpareTire

1. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
2. Refer to "Torque Specifications" in this section for proper wheel lug bolt torque.
3. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.

WARNING!

Aloosetireorjackthrownforwardinacollisionor hardstopcouldendangertheoccupantsofthevehicle.Alwaysstowthejackpartsandthesparetirein theplacesprovided.Havethedeflated(flat)tire repairedorreplacedimmediately.

1. Stow the cable and wheel spacer before driving the vehicle.

WARNING!

To avoid the riskofforcing the vehicle off the jack, donottightenthe wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury.

334 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

NOTE: For vehicles with alloy wheels remove the adapter bracket and bolts from the storage bag in the glove compartment. Take the adapter and fit the plastic spacer between the spring and the flange of the bracket (The adapter bracket is sold separately through the dealer). The plastic fin must be directed downwards and perfectly coincide with the flange cut part; fit the bracket in the adapter, fold the bracket up and secure it to the adapter with the fastening knob. Position the tire vertically and lay the mounted adapter on the inner part of the rim, using the supplied bolts fasten the wheel to the adapter using the bolt install wrench. Tighten the bolts with the wrench handle. Rotate the winch mechanism clockwise until the wheel is properly stowed under the vehicle and until the wrench makes three audible noises. Reach underneath and shake tire by hand to confirm that it is secure. The tire should not move. If tire is still loose and/or three audible noises are not heard, place and secure damaged wheel into the vehicle and seek dealer assistance for the wrench mechanism. Thisisfortemporaryuseonly.

1 — Adapter
2 — Plastic Spacer

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 335

Adapter/Bracket

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a motor or gear assembly with mounting holes and directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols present)

0605077534

1 — Adapter
2 — Fastening Knob

1. Stow the jack and tools under the drivers seat.
2. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct the tire pressure, as required.

336 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers

1. Mount the road tire on the axle.

2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with wheel covers, install two wheel bolts on the wheel. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.

TireAndWheelCoverOrCenterCap

1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover
2 — Valve Notch 5 — Road Wheel
3 — Wheel Bolt

1. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,

snapping the cover over the two wheel bolts. Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.

1. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.

WARNING!

To avoid the riskofforcing the vehicle off the jack, donottightenthe wheel bolts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.

1. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
2. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the wrench while holding at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 337

pattern until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for correct wheel bolt torque.

1. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are properly seated against the wheel.

JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES

If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.

NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.

338 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!

Donotattemptjump-startingifthebatteryisfrozen. Itcouldruptureorexplodeandcausepersonalinjury.

CAUTION!

Donotuseaportablebatteryboosterpackorany otherboostersourcewithasystemvoltagegreater than12Voltsordamagetothebattery,startermotor, alternatororelectricalsystemmayoccur.

Preparations For Jump-Start

The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.

NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the positive battery post.

Interior view of a vehicle engine bay with visible components and a black arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols)

PositiveBatteryPost

WARNING!

• Takecaretoavoidtheradiatorcoolingfanwheneverthehoodisraised.ItcanstartanytimetheignitionswitchisON.Youcanbeinjuredbymovingfanblades.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Removeanymetaljewelrysuchasrings, watch bandsandbraceletsthatcouldmakeaninadvertent electricalcontact. Youcouldbeseriouslyinjured.

• Batteriescontainsulfuricacidthatcanburnyour skinoreyesandgeneratehydrogengaswhichis flammableandexplosive.Keepopenflamesor sparksawayfromthebattery.

• Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.

• Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
• If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!

Donotallowvehiclestotoucheachotherasthis couldestablishagroundconnectionandpersonal injurycouldresult.

Jump-Starting Procedure

WARNING!

Failuretofollowthisjump-startingprocedurecould resultinpersonalinjuryorpropertydamagedueto batteryexplosion.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle orthedischarged vehicle.

340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

ConnectingTheJumperCables

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)jumper cable to the positive (+)post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)jumper cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle's engine) away from the battery and the fuel injection system.

WARNING!

Donotconnectthejumpercabletothenegative(-)post ofthedischargedbattery. Theresultingelectricalspark

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

couldcausethebatterytoexplodeandcouldresultin personalinjury.Onlyusethespecificgroundpoint,do notuseanyotherexposedmetalparts.

1. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence:

DisconnectingTheJumperCables

1. Disconnect the negative (-)end of the jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

3. Disconnect the positive (+)end of the jumper cable from the positive (+)post of the booster battery.

4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
   If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. Push and hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE, while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.

NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than 2 seconds, you must push the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.

CAUTION!

Racingtheengineorspinningthewheelsmayleadto transmissionoverheatingandfailure.AllowtheenginetoidlewiththetransmissioninNEUTRALforat leastoneminuteaftereveryfiverocking-motion cycles.Thiswillminimizeoverheatingandreduce theriskoftransmissionfailureduringprolonged effortstofreeastuckvehicle.

342 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

NOTE: Push the "ESC Off" switch, to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in "Partial Off" mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to "Electronic Brake Control System" in "Starting And Operating". Once the vehicle has been freed, push the "ESC Off" switch again to restore "ESC On" mode.

WARNING!

Fastspinningtirescanbedangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheels speeds may caused damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. Atire could explode and injuresome one. Donot spiny our vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck. And donot let any on near aspinning wheel, nomatter what the speed.

CAUTION!

• When "rocking" astuckvehiclebyshiftingbetweenDRIVEandREVERSE, donotspinthe wheelsfasterthan15mph(24km/h), or drivetrain damagemayresult.
• Revvingtheengineorspinningthewheelstoofast mayleadtotransmissionoverheatingandfailure. Itcanalsodamagethetires.Donotspinthewheels above30mph(48km/h)whileingear(notransmissionshiftingoccurring).

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.

TowingConditionWheelOFFtheGroundALLMODELS
Flat Tow NONE NOTALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Rear NOTALLOWED
		Front OK
Flatbed ALLBESTMETHOD

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer's instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.

If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN position.

If the ignition key is unavailable, or the vehicle's battery is discharged, refer to "GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE" in this section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK for towing.

344 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!

• Donotusesling-typeequipmentwhentowing. Vehicledamagemayoccur.
• Whensecuringthevehicletoaflatbedtruck, donot attachtofrontorrearsuspensioncomponents. Damagetoyourvehiclemayresultfromimproper towing.

The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.

If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must be towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels raised).

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle inviolation of the aboverequirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from impropertowing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the gear selector:

1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully separate the gear selector boot from the center console.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 345

Interior view of a car gear shift lever with control buttons and a black arrow pointing to the left side (no text or symbols on the lever itself)

GearSelectorBootLocation

1. Push and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.

2. Insert a small screwdriver or a similar tool into the gear selector override access hole (at the right front corner of the gear selector assembly) then push and hold the override release lever down. While still holding down the override release lever, move the

gear selector to the NEUTRAL position (the shift knob button must be pushed normally to move the lever).

GearSelectorOverrideAccessHole

1. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.

2. Reinstall the gear selector boot.

346 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE

This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/OFF (key removal) position. To remove the key manually, proceed as follows:

1. Firmly apply the parking brake
2. Remove the Allen Key located in the rear cargo area, in the tool bag (if equipped) or on the left side in the cargo box.
3. Unlock the steering column, pull the tilt/telescoping control handle down.

4. Pull the steering wheel outward until it is in the end of the travel position, then lock the steering column in position, push the control handle up until fully engaged.

5. Using the Allen key, undo the lower steering column cover screws, and remove the lower cover.

Mechanical component diagram showing a car interior with connected circular components and an arrow pointing to a specific point (no text or symbols present)

LowerSteeringColumnScrewLocations

1. Pull the release tab downwards using one hand and with the other one remove the key, sliding it outwards.

Close-up of a car's internal engine compartment showing valve and hub assembly (no text or symbols visible)

ReleaseTabLocation

1. Once the key is removed, reinstall the steering column cover.

CAUTION!

ItisadvisabletocontactyourAuthorizedDealerto havethereinstallprocedurecarriedout.Ifyouwould liketoproceedinperformingthereinstallprocedure specialattentionmustbepaidtothecorrectcoupling oftheclips.Otherwisedamagetothecoverornoise mightbeheardduetoincorrectfasteningofthe lowercover.

ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS)

This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident Response System.

Please refer to "Refer to the Owner's Manual on the DVD for further details regarding the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).

348 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed.

Please refer to "Refer to the Owner's Manual on the DVD for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

■ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L . . . . . . . . . . .351
■ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .352

□Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity....352

□Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

■EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS....354
■REPLACEMENT PARTS....355
■DEALER SERVICE....355
■MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES....356

□Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
□Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
□Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
□Maintenance-Free Battery....361
□Air Conditioner Maintenance .....362
□Body Lubrication....363
□Windshield Wiper Blades....364
□Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
□Exhaust System....366
□Cooling System....368

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

□Brake System....374
□Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
□Automatic Transmission....377
□Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion....379

■FUSES....386

□Underhood Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
□Interior Fuses....390
□Central Unit Fuse Panel....393

■VEHICLE STORAGE....394

■REPLACEMENT BULBS....395

■BULB REPLACEMENT....396

□Headlamps....396

□Front Turn Signal Lamps....397
□Parking And Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . .397
□Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
□Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps....398
□Third Brake Light (Center Mount) .....398
□License Plate Lights....399

■FLUID CAPACITIES....399

■FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS .....400

□Engine....400
□Chassis 402

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L

1 — Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
3 — Oil Fill Cap 7 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick

352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

- ProlongeddrivingwiththeMILoncouldcause furtherdamagetotheemissioncontrolsystem.It couldalsoaffectfueleconomyanddriveability. Thevehiclemustbeservicedbeforeanyemissions testscanbeperformed.

- If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running, severecatalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediately service is required.

Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity

Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to information related to the performance of your emissions controls. Authorized service technicians may need to

access this information to assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and emissions system.

WARNING!

• ONLYanaauthorizedservicetechniciansshouldconnectequipmenttotheOBDIIconnectionportinordertodiagnoseorserviceyourvehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBDI connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
• Bepossible that vehiclesystems, including safetyrelatedsystems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access,orallowotherstoaccess,information storedinyourvehiclesystems,includingpersonalinformation.

For further information, refer to "Cybersecurity" in the "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" section.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a "Check fuel cap" message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information. Tighten the gas cap until a "clicking" sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened.

Push the odometer reset button to turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off.

354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing.

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:

1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine.

NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over.

1. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, you will see the "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
2. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen:
3. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF

the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is notready and you should not proceed to the I/M station.

- The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.

If your OBD II system is notready, you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is nowready.

Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.

REPLACEMENT PARTS

Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

DEALER SERVICE

Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.

356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only doservicework for which you have the knowledge and the properequipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle.

Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed "Maintenance Schedule", there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future.

CAUTION!

• Failuretoproperlymaintainyourvehicleorperformrepairsandservicewhennecessarycould resultinmorecostlyrepairs,damagetoother componentsornegativelyimpactvehicleperformance.Immediatelyhavepotentialmalfunctions examinedbyanauthorizeddealerorqualified repaircenter.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Donot use chemical flushes in these components as the chemical scandamage you are engine,

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

transmissionorairconditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure.

Engine Oil

CheckingOilLevel

To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every month. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.

There are three possible dipstick types,

• Crosshatched zone.
  • Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
• Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range.

NOTE: Always maintain the oil level within the cross-hatch markings on the dipstick.

Adding 1 quart (1.0 liters) of oil when the reading is at the low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the high end of the range marking.

CAUTION!

Overfillingorunderfillingthecrankcasewillcause aerationorlossofoilpressure.Thiscoulddamage yourengine.

358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ChangeEngineOil

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for further information.

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers.

EngineOilSelection

For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.

AmericanPetroleumInstitute(API)EngineOil IdentificationSymbol

This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils.

This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.

CAUTION!

Donotusechemicalflushesinyourengineoilasthe chemicalscandamageyourengine.Suchdamageis notcoveredbytheNewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

EngineOilViscosity(SAEGrade)—2.4LEngine

MOPAR SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in this section.

Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.

SyntheticEngineOils

You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed.

Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.

MaterialsAddedToEngineOil

The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.

DisposingOfUsedEngineOilAndOilFilters

Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.

Engine Oil Filter

The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change.

EngineOilFilterSelection

This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter

Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.

NOTE: Be sure to follow the "Sever Duty Conditions" maintenance interval if applicable.

WARNING!

Theairinductionsystem(aircleaner,hoses,etc.)can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Donotremovetheairinduction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Makes sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

vehiclewiththeairinductionsystem(aircleaner, hoses,etc.)removed.Failureretodosocanresultin seriouspersonalinjury.

EngineAirCleanerFilterSelection

The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.

Maintenance-Free Battery

Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.

WARNING!

• Batteryfluidisacorrosiveacidsolutionandcan burnorevenblindyou.Donotallowbatteryfluid tocontactyoureyes,skin,orclothing.Donotlean overabatterywhenattachingclamps.Ifacid splashesineyesoronskin,flushtheareaimmediatelywithlargeamountsofwater.Referto "Jump-StartingProcedures"in"WhatToDoIn Emergencies"forfurtherinformation.
• Batterygasisflammableandexplosive.Keep flameorsparksawayfromthebattery.Donotuse aboosterbatteryoranyotherboostersourcewith anoutputgreaterthan12Volts.Donotallowcable clampstotoucheachother.
• Batteryposts,terminals,andrelatedaccessories containleadandleadcompounds.Washhands afterhandling.

CAUTION!

• It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and then negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamp should be ignition on the terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• Ifa "fastcharger" is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Donot use a "fastcharger" to provide starting voltage.

Air Conditioner Maintenance

For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include

cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.

WARNING!

• Useonlyrefrigerantsandcompressorlubricants approvedbythemanufacturerforyourairconditioningsystem.Someunapprovedrefrigerantsare flammableandcanexplode,injuringyou.Other unapprovedrefrigerantsorlubricantscancausethe systemtofail,requiringcostlyrepairs.Referto WarrantyInformationBook,locatedontheDVD, forfurtherwarrantyinformation.
• The airconditioningsystem contains refrigerant underhigh pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring linestobedisconnected should be done by an experienced technician.

CAUTION!

Donotusechemicalflushesinyourairconditioning systemasthechemicalscandamageyourairconditioningcomponents.Suchdamageisnotcoveredby theNewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a—If Equipped

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R1234yf—If Equipped

R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoole-fine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.

Body Lubrication

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to

364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.

Windshield Wiper Blades

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.

Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.

WiperServicePosition

If it is necessary to lift the blade from the windshield (In the event of snow or blade replacement) Proceed as directed:

1. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the OFF position.
2. Turn the ignition to the MAR-ON position then to STOP.
3. After turning the ignition to the STOP, within two minutes move the right stalk upward, into the unstable ("anti-panic") position, for at least half of a second. The windshield wiper then executes part of a stroke; at each command, approximately 1/3 of a normal wiper stroke is triggered.

NOTE: The previous operation can be repeated up to three times. In order to move the blades to the most suitable position.

1. Lift the blade from the windshield and proceed with the required operation.
2. Carefully lower the blade, bringing it back in contact with the windshield.
3. Bring the blade to the initial rest position, turning the ignition to MAR-ON.

NOTE: Do not operate the screen wiper with the blades lifted from the windshield.

Adding Washer Fluid

The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.

366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.

To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers.

WARNING!

Commerciallyavailablewindshieldwashersolvents areflammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washers solution.

Exhaust System

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

WARNING!

• Exhaustgasescaninjureorkill. They contain carbonmonoxide(CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to "Safety Tips/ExhaustGas" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
• Ahotexhaustsystemcanstartafireifyoupark overmaterialsthatcanburn.Suchmaterialsmight begrassorleavescomingintocontactwithyour exhaustsystem.Donotparkoroperateyourvehicleinareaswhereyourehaustsystemcancontactanythingthatcanburn.

CAUTION!

• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and causes serious damage to the engine.
• Damagethecatalyticconvertercanresultifyour vehicleisnotkeptinproperoperatingcondition. Intheeventofenginemalfunction,particularly involvingenginemisfireorotherapparentlossof performance,haveyourvehicleservicedpromptly. Continuedoperationofyourvehiclewithasevere malfunctioncouldcausetheconvertertooverheat, resultinginpossibledamagetheconverterand vehicle.

368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should be obtained immediately.

To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:

- Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.

• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.

Cooling System

WARNING!

Youorotherscanbebadlyburnedbyhotengine coolant(antifreeze)orsteamfromyourradiator.If youseeorhearsteamcomingfromunderthehood, donotopenthehooduntiltheradiatorhashadtime tocool.Nevertrytoopenacoolingsystempressure capwhetheradiatororcoolantbottleishot.

EngineCoolantChecks

Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser.

Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.

With the engine at normal operating temperature (but not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.

If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.

CoolingSystem—Drain,FlushAndRefill

NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system, please contact your local authorized dealer.

If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).

Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.

SelectionOfCoolant

Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.

CAUTION!

- Mixingofenginecoolant(antifreeze)otherthan specifiedOrganicAdditiveTechnology(OAT)enginecoolant(antifreeze),mayresultinengine damageandmaydecreasecorrosionprotection. OrganicAdditiveTechnology(OAT)enginecoolantisdifferentandshouldnotbemixedwith HybridOrganicAdditiveTechnology(HOAT)enginecoolant(antifreeze)orany"globallycompatible"coolant(antifreeze).Ifanon-OATengine coolant(antifreeze)isintroducedintothecooling systeminanemergency,thecoolingsystemwill needtobedrained,flushed,andrefilledwithfresh

CAUTION!(Continued)

OATcoolant(conformingtoMS.90032),byana- thorizeddealerassoonaspossible.

• Donotusewateraloneoralcohol-basedengine coolant(antifreeze)products.Donotuseadditional rustinhibitorsorantirustproducts,astheymaynot becompatiblewiththeenginecoolantandmay plugtheradiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

AddingCoolant

Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (anti-freeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles

(Continued)

(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.

Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):

• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34^ ( -37^ ) are anticipated. Please contact your authorized dealer for assistance.

- Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.

NOTE:

• It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system, please contact your local authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If

372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.

CoolingSystemPressureCap

The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

The image on the coolant system pressure cap is a reminder that the radiator contains hot engine coolant under pressure.

WARNING!

• Donotopenhotenginecoolingsystem.Neveradd enginecoolant(antifreeze)whentheengineis overheated.Donotloosenorremovethecaptocool anoverheatedengine.Heatcausespressure to buildupinthecoolingsystem.Topreventscalding orinjury,donotremovethepressurecapwhile the systemishotorunderpressure.
• Donotuseapressurecapotherthantheone specifiedforyourvehicle.Personalinjuryorenginedamagemayresult.

DisposalOfUsedEngineCoolant

Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based

engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.

CoolantLevel

The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the "MIN" and "MAX" marks.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.

When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.

PointsToRemember

NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/ kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.

If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

- Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.

374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean.

- Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.

Brake System

In order to assure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

Ridingthebrakescanleadtobrakefailureand possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or ridingonthebrakepedalcanresultinabnormally

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

highbraketemperatures,excessiveliningwear,and possiblebrakedamage.Youwouldnothaveyourfull brakingcapacityinanemergency.

BrakeMasterCylinder

The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the "Brake Warning Light" is illuminated.

Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.

Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.

WARNING!

• Useonlymanufacturer's recommended brake fluid. Referto "Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brakes system and/or impair performance. The property of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
  • To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep them master

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

cylinderreservoircapsecuredatalltimes.Brake fluidinaopencontainerabsorbsmoisturefromthe airresultinginalowerboilingpoint.Thismay causeittoboilunexpectedlyduringhardorprolongedbraking,resultinginsuddenbrakefailure. Thiscouldresultinacollision.

• Overfillingthebrakefluidreservoircanresultin spillingbrakefluidonhotengineparts, causing thebrakefluidtocatchfire. Brakefluidcanalso damagepaintedandvinylsurfaces, careshouldbe takentoavoiditscontactwiththesesurfaces.
- Donotallowpetroleumbasedfluidtocontaminate thebrakefluid.Brakesealcomponentscouldbe damaged,causingpartialorcompletebrakefailure. Thiscouldresultinacollision.

Power Steering Fluid

Check the fluid level with the vehicle on flat ground and engine cold. Fluid should be between MIN and MAX references on the reservoir body.

The level may go over the MAX line when oil is hot.

If topping off is required, make sure the oil you use is approved. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts" in the section for further information.

WARNING!

Becauseitisflammable, donotallow the power steering fluid to come into contact with hot engine parts

NOTE: Power steering fluid consumption is very low. If you need to top off your fluid often and multiple times have your system inspected by your authorized dealer.

Automatic Transmission

SelectionOfLubricant

It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the manufacturer's specified transmission fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts" in this section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid.

NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.

CAUTION!

Usingatransmissionfluidotherthanthemanufac-turer'srecommendedfluidmaycausedeterioration

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

intransmissionshiftqualityand/ororqueconverter shudder. Referto"Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts" in this section for fluids specifications.

SpecialAdditives

The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.

378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

Donotusechemicalflushesinyourtransmissionas thechemicalscandamageyourtransmissioncomponents.SuchdamageisnotcoveredbytheNew VehicleLimitedWarranty.

FluidLevelCheck

The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.

CAUTION!

Ifatransmissionfluidleakoccurs,visityourauthorizeddealerimmediately.Severetransmissiondamagemayoccur.Yourauthorizeddealerhastheproper toolstoadjustthefluidlevelaccurately.

FluidAndFilterChanges

Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle.

Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.

Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion

ProtectionOfBodyAndPaintFromCorrosion

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-body protection.

The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.

WhatCausesCorrosion?

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

The most common causes are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

Washing

- Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.

380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.

CAUTION!

• Donotuseabrasiveorstrongcleaningmaterials suchassteelwoolorscouringpowderthatwill scratchmetalandpaintedsurfaces.
• Useofpowerwashersexceeding1,200psi(8274kPa) canresultindamageorremovalofpaintanddecals.

SpecialCare

• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.

• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.

• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed.

• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.

WheelAndWheelTrimCare

All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.

Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or

control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel's protective coating that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.

NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel surface.

CAUTION!

Avoidproductsorautomaticcarwashesthatuse acidicsolutionsorstrongalkalineadditivesorharsh brushes. Theseproductsandautomaticcarwashes maydamagethewheel'sprotectivefinish.Such damageisnotcoveredbytheNewVehicleLimited Warranty.Onlycarwashsoap,MOPARWheel Cleanerorequivalentisrecommended.

382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

CAUTION!

Donotusescouringpads,steelwool,abristlebrush, metalpolishesorovencleaner. Theseproductsmay damagethewheel'sprotectivefinish.Suchdamageis notcoveredbytheNewVehicleLimitedWarranty. Onlycarwashsoap,MOPARWheelCleanerorequivalentisrecommended.

NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.

DarkVaporOrBlackSatinChromeWheels

CAUTION!

If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vaporor Black Satin Chromewheels DONOTUSEwheel cleaners, abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILDSOAP AND WATER WITH ASOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis this all that is required to maintain this finish.

StainRepelFabricCleaningProcedure—If Equipped

Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:

• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products.

InteriorCare

Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting.

Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.

MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.

384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Donotusevolatilesolventsforcleaningpurposes. Manyarepotentiallyflammable,andifusedin closedareastheymaycauserespiratoryharm.

CAUTION!

Directcontactofairfresheners,insectrepellents, suntanlotions,orhandsanitizerstotheplastic, painted,ordecoratedsurfacesoftheinteriormay causepermanentdamage.Wipeawayimmediately.

CAUTION!

Damagecausedbythesetypeofproductsmaynotbe coveredbyyourNewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

CAUTION!

DonotuseAlcoholandAlcohol-basedand/orKeton basedcleaningproductstocleanleatherseats,as damagetotheseatmayresult.

CleaningHeadlights

Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.

Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.

Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.

GlassSurfaces

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.

CleaningPlasticInstrumentClusterLenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.

SeatBeltMaintenance

Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.

If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly.

WARNING!

Afrayedortornbeltcouldripapartinacollisionand leaveyouwithnoprotection.Inspectthebeltsystem periodically,checkingforcuts,frays,orlooseparts. Damagedpartsmustbereplacedimmediately.Do notdisassembleormodifythesystem.Seatbelt assembliesmustbereplacedafteracollisionifthey havebeendamaged(i.e.,bentretractor,tornwebbing,etc.).

FUSES

WARNING!

• Whenreplacingablownfuse,alwaysuseanappropriatereplacementfusewiththesameamp ratingastheoriginalfuse.Neverreplaceafuse withanotherfuseofhigheramprating.Never replaceablownfusewithmetalwiresoranyother material.Failurerouseproperfusesmayresultin seriouspersonalinjury,fireand/orpropertydamage.
• Before-replacingafuse, makesurethattheignition isoffandthatalltheotherservicesareswitchedoff and/ordisengaged.
• Ifthereplacedfuseblowsagain,contactanaauthorizeddealer.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- Ifageneralprotectionfuseforsafetysystems(air bagsystem,brakingsystem),powerunitsystems (enginesystem,gearboxsystem)orsteeringsystem blows,contactanauthorizeddealer.

Underhood Fuses

The Front Distribution Unit is located on the right side of the engine compartment, next to the battery. To access the fuses, remove fasteners and remove the cover.

Interior view of a vehicle engine bay with visible components and a black arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols)

FrontDistributionUnit

The ID number of the electrical component corresponding to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover.

CavityMaxiFuseMiniFuseDescription
F01 60 Amp Blue – Body Controller
F02 40 Amp Orange		–	Front Heated Seats, Second 12 Volt IP Outlet
CavityMaxiFuseMiniFuseDescription
F02 60 Amp Blue – Rear Power Window Including Front			Heated Seats, Second 12 Volt IP Outlet
F03 20 Amp Yellow – Ignition Switch
F04 40 Amp Orange – BSM System Module
F06 30 Amp Green – Radiator Fan - Low Speed
F07 40 Amp Orange – Radiator Fan - High Speed
F08 40 Amp Orange – Blower Motor
F10	-	10 Amp Red	Horn
F11	-	10 Amp Red	Secondary Loads ECM
F14	- 15 Amp Blue	High Beam
F16	-	5 Amp Tan	ECM and Transmission Shifter
F17	-	25 Amp Clear	ECM Power Loads
F18	-	5 Amp Tan	ECM Load, Main Relay
F19	-	7.5 Amp Brown	Air Conditioning
F20	- 30 Amp Green	Rear Defroster
F21 – 5 Amp Tan Key Unlock
F22 – 10 Amp Red Primary ECM Loads
F23 – 20 Amp Yellow BSM System
F24 – 5 Amp Tan BSM System, Positive Key and Steering			Angle Sensor
F30 – 15 Amp Blue Fog Lamp
F83 20 Amp Yellow – Fuel Pump
F84 – 15 Amp Blue AT Module
F85 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Power Outlet 12V
F86 –	30 Amp Green	IP Power Outlet 12V
F87 – 5 Amp Tan IBS
F88 –	7.5 Amp Brown	External Mirror Defrost

390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Interior Fuses

The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control Module (BCM) and is located on the driver's side under the instrument panel.

Close-up of a mechanical component with an arrow pointing to a specific area (no visible text or symbols)

FusePanelCover

FusePanelCavityLocations

CavityMiniFuseDescription
F53 5 Amp Beige	KL 30 (+30) - IPC
F38 20 Amp Yellow	Central Doors Locking
F36 10 Amp Red	KL 30 (+30) - TPMS, EOBD, HVAC,	Radio
F43 15 Amp Blue	Bi-Directional Washer Pump
F48 20 Amp Yellow	Passenger Power Windows
F50 7.5 Amp Brown	KL 15 (+15) - Air-Bag
F51 7.5 Amp Brown		KL 15 (+15) - External Mirror Adjustment Command, HVAC, RVC, HWB Coils
F37 5 Amp Beige	KL 15 (+15) - Brake Pedal Switch	(N.O.), IPC, Brake Pedal Switch (N.C.)
F49 5 Amp Beige	KL 15 (+15) - PAM, CSS Lighting, ECM	Backlighting, TTM
F31 5 Amp Beige	KL 15a (INT A) - HWB, MCO
F47 20 Amp Yellow	Driver Power Windows

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393

Central Unit Fuse Panel

The central power fuse panel is located on the driver's side under the instrument panel.

Close-up of a mechanical component with an arrow pointing to a specific area, no visible text or symbols.

FusePanelCover

FusePanel

CavityMiniFuseDescription
F1 10 Amp Red	Front Heated Seat Driver
F2 10 Amp Red	Front Heated Seat Passenger
F3 20 Amp Yellow	Rear Power Window Driver side
F4 20 Amp Yellow	Rear Power Window Passenger side
F5 15 Amp Blue	2nd Instrument Panel Power	Outlet 12V

VEHICLE STORAGE

If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days, you may want to take these steps to protect your battery.

- Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.

- Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

REPLACEMENT BULBS

Interior Bulbs

LampsBulbNumber
Front Courtesy Lamps C10W
Rear Courtesy Lamps C10W
Luggage Lamp C5W

Exterior Bulbs

LampsBulbNumber
Front Low Beam Headlamp H11
Front High Beam Headlamps HB3
Front Side Marker Lamps LED (See your authorized dealer)
Front Parking/Daytime Running Lamps W21W
Front Turn Signal Lamps WY21W
Rear Stop Lamp P21W
Rear Turn Signal Lamps PY21W

396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

LampsBulbNumber
Rear Tail Lamps P21/5W
Rear Side Marker Lamps LED (See your authorized dealer)
Center Mount Brake Lamp W5W
Reverse Light W16W
Front Fog Lamps H11
NOTE:Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.

BULB REPLACEMENT

NOTE:Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process.

Headlamps

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:

1. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the headlamp housing.
2. Rotate the bulb counter-clockwise.

3. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.

4. Install the bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in place.

5. Reinstall the plastic cap.

Front Turn Signal Lamps

Front

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:

1. Remove the cap from the back of the outer upper headlamp housing.
2. Rotate the bulb counter clockwise and remove.
3. Install the bulb into socket.
4. Rotate bulb/socket clockwise into lamp locking it in place.
5. Reinstall the plastic cap.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397

Parking And Daytime Running Lights

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:

1. Remove the cap from the back of the outer lower headlamp housing.
2. Rotate the bulb counter clockwise and remove.
3. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/socket clockwise into lamp locking it in place.
4. Reinstall the plastic cap.

Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:

The front/rear side marker lamps are LED and not serviced separately. See your authorized dealer for replacement of these lights.

398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps

The rear light clusters contain taillight, brake light, direction indicator and reverse/rear fog light bulbs. To access the light clusters, proceed as follows:

1. Open the rear doors. or liftgate
2. Remove the screws and remove the tail lamp assembly.
3. Remove the screws and separate the backplate from the lamp housing.
4. Remove the tail, stop, or turn signal bulbs by pushing them slightly and turning counter-clockwise.
5. Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling straight out.
6. Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp.
   The bulbs are arranged inside the light cluster as follows:

Third Brake Light (Center Mount)

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:

1. For versions with tailgate, loosen the two fastening screws and extract the cluster.
2. For versions with swing doors, remove rubber plugs, remove retaining tabs and extract the cluster.
3. For versions with high roof and swing doors, remove the pressure-fit plastic guard and rubber cap using a screwdriver, release the retaining tags as shown in the figure and remove the unit.
4. Remove the appropriate tabs and remove the bulb holder.
5. Remove the snap-fitted bulb and replace it.

License Plate Lights

Proceed as follows to replace the bulbs:

1. Disengage the holding tabs and remove the lens by lifting to the left.

2. Remove the bulbs by releasing them from the side contacts; insert the new bulbs and make sure they are correctly clamped between these contacts.

FLUID CAPACITIES

	U.S.Metric
Fuel(Approximate)
2.4L Engine 16 Gallons 60.5 Liters
EngineOilWithFilter
2.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 5.5	Quarts 5.2 Liters
CoolingSystem*
2.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)	7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine

ComponentFluid,Lubricant,orGenuinePart
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API CertifiedEngine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a MOPAR Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.

CAUTION!

- Mixingofenginecoolant(antifreeze)otherthan specifiedOrganicAdditiveTechnology(OAT)enginecoolant(antifreeze),mayresultinengine damageandmaydecreasecorrosionprotection. OrganicAdditiveTechnology(OAT)enginecoolantisdifferentandshouldnotbemixedwith HybridOrganicAdditiveTechnology(HOAT)enginecoolant(antifreeze)orany"globallycompatible"coolant(antifreeze).Ifanon-OATengine coolant(antifreeze)isintroducedintothecooling systeminanemergency,thecoolingsystemwill needtobedrained,flushed,andrefilledwithfresh OATcoolant(conformingtoMS.90032),byanauthorizeddealerassoonaspossible.

CAUTION!(Continued)

• Donotusewateraloneoralcohol-basedengine coolant(antifreeze)products.Donotuseadditional rustinhibitorsorantirustproducts,astheymaynot becompatiblewiththeradiatorenginecoolantand mayplugtheradiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

(Continued)

402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Chassis

ComponentFluid,Lubricant,orGenuinePart

Automatic Transmission Use only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.

Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 4.

Power Steering Reservoir Use Pentosin CHF 11S power steering fluid meeting FCA Material Standard MS-11655.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

CONTENTS

■ MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE....404

□ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

404 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.

Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extended engine idle time, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other

than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under "Oil Change Reset" in "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 350 hours of engine run time or twelve months, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers.

SevereDutyAllModels

Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is operated predominantly at idle or only very low engine RPM's. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.

OnceAMonthOrBeforeALongTrip:

• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and brake master cylinder, fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.

RequiredMaintenanceIntervals

Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page for the required maintenance intervals.

AtEveryOilChangeIntervalAsIndicatedByOil ChangeIndicatorSystem:

•Change oil and filter

• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregularwear,evenifitoccursbeforetheoilindicator systemturnson.

• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required

•Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses, lines and park brake

•Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses

•Inspect exhaust system

•Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions

Maintenance Chart

Mileage:	20,000	30,000	40,000	50,000	60,000	70,000	80,000	90,000	100,000	110,000	120,000	130,000	140,000	150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:	32,000	48,000	64,000	80,000	96,000	112,000	128,000	144,000	160,000	176,000	192,000	208,000	224,000	240,000
Additional Inspections
InspecttheCVjoints.XXXXXX X
Inspectfrontsuspension,bootseals,tierodends,andreplaceifnecessary.	X		X		X		X		X		X		X
Inspectthebrakelinings,parkingbrakefunction. XXXXXX				X
Inspectfrontaccessorydrivebelt,tensioner,idlerpulley,andreplaceifnecessary.														X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. *		X			X			X			X			X
Replaceairconditioning/cabinairfilter. XXXXXX				X
Changebrakefluideverytwoyears.XXXXXX	X
Replacesparkplugs.**									X
Flushandreplacetheenginecoolantat10years or150,000miles(240,000km)whichevercomes first.									X					X
InspectandreplacePCVvalveifnecessary.								X

* Change engine air filter every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) if operated in dusty and off road environment.
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.

WARNING!

• Youcanbebadlyinjuredworkingonorarounda motorvehicle.Doonlyserviceworkforwhichyou havetheknowledgeandtherightequipment.If youhaveanydoubtaboutyourabilitytoperforma servicejob,takeyourvehicletoacompetentmechanic.
• Failuretoproperlyinspectandmaintainyourvehiclecouldresultinacomponentmalfunctionandeffectvehiclehandlingandperformance.This couldcauseanaccident.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

CONTENTS

■SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE....411

□Prepare For The Appointment....4 1 1

□Prepare A List....4 1 1

□Be Reasonable With Requests....411

■IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE....411

□FCA USA LLC Customer Center....412

□FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .....412

□In Mexico Contact....413

□Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands . . . . . . . 413

□Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .....413

□Service Contract....413

■WARRANTY INFORMATION....415

■MOPARPARTS .....415

■REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS....415

□In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

□In Canada. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

■PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .....416

410 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

■DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES .....417

□Treadwear....417

□Traction Grades....418

□Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE

Prepare For The Appointment

If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's service history. This can often provide a clue to the current problem.

Prepare A List

Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor know.

Be Reasonable With Requests

If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer's authorized dealer have the

412 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.

This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process.

• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the manufacturer's customer center.

Any communication to the manufacturer's customer center should include the following information:

• Owner's name and address

• Owner's telephone number (home and office)

• Authorized dealer name
  • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
  • Vehicle delivery date and mileage

FCA USA LLC Customer Center

P.O. Box 21-8004

Auburn Hills, MI 48321-8004

Phone: [phone]

FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center

P.O. Box 1621

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone: [phone] English / [phone] French

In Mexico Contact

In Mexico City: 5081-7568

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300

Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands

Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC

P.O. Box 191857

San Juan 00919-1857

Tel.: [phone]

Fax: [phone]

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.

Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.

Service Contract

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited

414 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer's service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer's service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer's Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call [phone] English / [phone] French).

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer's service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer's service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer's service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.

We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.

WARNING!

Engineexhaust(internalcombustionenginesonly), someofitsconstituents,andcertainvehiclecomponentscontain,oremit,chemicalsknowntotheState ofCaliforniatocausecancerandbirthdefects,or otherreproductiveharm.Inaddition,certainfluids containedinvehiclesandcertainproductsofcomponentwearcontain,oremit,chemicalsknowntothe StateofCaliforniatocausecancerandbirthdefects, orotherreproductiveharm.

WARRANTY INFORMATION

See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.

MOPAR PARTS

MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your authorized dealer, and the manufacturer.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

416 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS

To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form.

NOTE:A street address is required when ordering manuals (no P.O. Boxes).

ServiceManuals

These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

DiagnosticProcedureManuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.

Owner's Manuals

These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.

Call toll free at:

•1-800-890-4038(U.S.)
•1-800-387-1143(Canada)

Or

Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:

• www.techauthority.com

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES

The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle.

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart

significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING!

Thetractiongradeassignedtothistireisbasedon straight-aheadbrakingtractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

Temperature Grades

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!

Thetemperaturegradeforthistireisestablished for atirethatisproperlyinflatedandnotoverloaded. Excessivespeed,under-inflation,orexcessiveloading,eitherseparatelyorincombination,cancause heatbuildupandpossibletirefailure.

INDEX

422 INDEX

Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .....370

Additives, Fuel .....290

Air Bag....

Advance Front Air Bag 48

Air Bag Operation 49

Air Bag Warning Light 57

Driver Knee Air Bag 50

Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 347

Event Data Recorder (EDR) .....59, 348

FrontAirBag....

If A Deployment Occurs....5 5

Knee Impact Bolsters....50

Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . 5 8

Transporting Pets 85

Air Bag Deployment 4

Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 88, 158

Air Bag Maintenance....58

Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .360

Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Air Conditioning Refrigerant .....362, 363

Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Air Filter .360

Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Air Recirculation....211

Alarm (Security Alarm)....16

Alarm System (Security Alarm) 16

Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle....7

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370, 399

Disposal....372

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)....247

Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Ashtray....137

Audio Systems (Radio) .....204

Auto Down Power Windows 26

Automatic Transaxle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 225

Automatic Transmission....228, 230, 378

Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378, 402

Fluid And Filter Changes .....378

INDEX 423

Fluid Change 378

Fluid Level Check....377,378

Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377, 402

Special Additives....377

Auto Up Power Windows 26

Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) .....134

Axle Lubrication....402

Battery....160,361

Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ..... 1 9

Belts, Seat 8 8

Body Builders Guide 6

Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

B-Pillar Location. 263

Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Brake Fluid 402

Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Brake System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247, 374

Anti-Lock (ABS) 247

Fluid Check....375,402

Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Parking....244

Warning Light....163

Brake/Transmission Interlock....230

Bulb Replacement....395, 396

Bulbs, Light. .90, 395

Camera, Rear....132

Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Caps, Filler

Fuel. 292

Oil (Engine)....351, 359

Power Steering....244

Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 291

Cargo Tie-Downs....140

Car Washes....379

Cellular Phone 207

Certification Label. 294

Chains, Tire .280

Chart, Tire Sizing .....258

Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .354

Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 86

Checks, Safety 86

Child Restraint 60

Child Restraints Booster Seats....6 5

Child Restraints 60

How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt ..... 7 4

Infants And Child Restraints 63

Older Children And Child Restraints ..... 6 3

Cigar Lighter....137

Clean Air Gasoline....288

Cleaning Wheels ....381

Climate Control....208

Manual....208

Cold Weather Operation....226

Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Contract, Service....413

Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .....372

Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze)....370

Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Coolant Level....373

Disposal Of Used Coolant .....372

Drain, Flush, And Refill .....369

Inspection....369,373

Points To Remember .373

Pressure Cap 372

Radiator Cap 372

Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .....370, 399, 400

Corrosion Protection 379

Cruise Light....178

Cupholders....138

Customer Assistance 41

Customer Programmable Features .....194

Data Recorder, Event....5 9

Daytime Running Lights....1 1

Dealer Service. 355

Defroster, Rear Window....143

Defroster, Windshield .....89, 210

Diagnostic System, Onboard .....352

Dipsticks Oil (Engine) .....357

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Disposal Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .....372

Door Ajar. 161

Door Ajar Light....161

Door Locks....20

Doors....20

1Driving

Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing

Water. .241

4 Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .....134

Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Electric Remote Mirrors. 9 9

Electronic Brake Control System .....247

Brake Assist System .249

Electronic Range Select (ERS) .....239

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) .....255

Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) .....121

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .....251

Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .....156

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

Exit Trip....190

New Trip....

Start Of Trip Procedure .....190

Trip Computer ....190

426 INDEX

Trip Functions....191

Emergency, In Case Of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Jump Starting .337

Towing....343

Emission Control System Maintenance .....354

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

Air Cleaner....360

Block Heater....227

Break-In Recommendations....86

Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Coolant (Antifreeze) .....400

Cooling. 368

Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 291

Fails To Start....227

Flooded, Starting .....227

Fuel Requirements....287

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Oil.357,399,400

Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351, 359

Oil Filter 360

Oil Selection....358,399

Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Overheating....313

Starting....225

Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Engine Oil Viscosity Chart. 359

Enhanced Accident Response Feature. . . . . . . . .56, 347

Ethanol....288

Event Data Recorder....59

Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 291

Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87,366

Exterior Lights 90

Filters

Air Cleaner....360

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360, 400

Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

INDEX 427

Flashers

Hazard Warning....313

Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90, 176

Flash-To-Pass....1 1 4

Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Fluid, Brake....402

Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Fluid Leaks 91

Fluid Level Checks

Brake. 375

Engine Oil....357

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts .....400

Fog Lights....1 1 6,1

Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Fuel. 287

Additives....290

Clean Air. 288

Ethanol....288

Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .....292

Gasoline....287

Light....166

Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Methanol 288

Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287,400

Requirements.287

Specifications....400

Tank Capacity....399

Fuses....386

Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292, 353

Gasoline, Clean Air. 288

Gasoline (Fuel)....287

Gasoline, Reformulated .....288

Gear Ranges....233

Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 287

428 INDEX

Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295, 297
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating....294, 297
Guide, Body Builders 6
GVWR....294

Hazard Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Hazard Warning Flasher .....313

Headlights....1 Cleaning....384

Passing....1 1 4

Head Restraints....106

Heated Mirrors....143

Heated Seats. 105

Heater, Engine Block .....227

Hill Start Assist. .250

Hitches Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Holder, Cup....138
Hood Release....1 1 0
Ignition....12 Key....12
Ignition Key Removal....1 2
Immobilizer (Sentry Key)....14
Inside Rearview Mirror....96
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151, 152, 154, 176
Instrument Panel And Controls .....150
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning....385
Interior Appearance Care....383
Introduction....4
iPod Control. 204
iPod/USB/MP3 Control .....204
Bluetooth Streaming Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

INDEX 429

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Key-In Reminder 14

Key, Replacement....1 5

Keys....12

Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) 14

Lane Change Assist....1 1 5

Lap/Shoulder Belts. 35

Latches 91

Lead Free Gasoline....287

Leaks, Fluid 91

Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Light Bulbs....90,395

Lights. 90,113,114

Air Bag .57,88,

Brake Assist Warning....252

Brake Warning....163

Bulb Replacement....396

Cruise....178

Engine Temperature Warning....154

Exterior 90

Fog 173

Hazard Warning Flasher .....313

Low Fuel 166

Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .....172

Park....115,177

Passing....1 1 4

Seat Belt Reminder .....157

Service....396

Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .....168

Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Turn Signal .90, 176

Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .154, 176

158oading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294, 296

Capacities....296

Tires 263

Locks 20

Door....20 MOPAR Parts....355,415
Lubrication, Body .363 MTBE/ETBE .288
Lug Nuts....314 Multi-Function Control Lever....114
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 New Vehicle Break-In Period. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 6
Maintenance Procedures....356
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .172, 354 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Oil Change Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Methanol....288 Oil, Engine....357, 400
Mirrors....96 Capacity....399
Electric Powered....9 9 Change Interval....358
Electric Remote 99 Checking 357
Exterior Folding....97 Dipstick....357
Outside. 97 Disposal.360
Rearview....96 Filter....360,400
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

INDEX 431

Materials Added To 359

Pressure Warning Light....159

Recommendation....358,399

Synthetic....359

Viscosity....359,399

Oil Filter, Change .....360

Oil Filter, Selection .....360

Oil Pressure Light....159

Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Operator Manual (Owner's Manual) ..... 4

Outside Rearview Mirrors....97

Overheating, Engine ....313

Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) ..... 4 , 4

Paint Care....379

Parking Brake. 244

ParkSense System, Rear .....125

Passing Light....11

Personal Settings. 194

Pets. 85

Placard, Tire And Loading Information .....264

Power Mirrors....9 9

Steering....243, 244

Windows 25

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 2

Preparation For Jacking....326

Pretensioners Seat Belts....4 2

Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .....372

Radio Frequency General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 20

Radio Operation....207

Rear Camera....132

.Rear ParkSense System....125

Rear Window Defroster....211

Recorder, Event Data....5 9 Safety, Exhaust Gas....8 7
Recreational Towing....309 Safety Information, Tire....256
Reformulated Gasoline....288 Safety Tips....86
Refrigerant....363 Schedule,Maintenance....404
Reminder, Seat Belt. 3 3 Seat Belt
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .....205 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage .....4 0
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . . 4 3
Replacement Keys 15 Energy Management Feature 43
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Replacement Tires .279 Lap/Shoulder Belts 35
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 9
Restraint, Head. 106 Pregnant Women. 4 2
Restraints, Child. 60 Seat Belt Pretensioner 42
Restraints, Occupant 31 Seat Belt Reminder 33
Rotation, Tires....281 Seat Belt System....3 1
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 8 8 Seat Belt Reminder 3 3
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 90 Seat Belts .33,88
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 0

INDEX 433

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 4 0 Shifting

Child Restraint....60 Automatic Transmission....230

Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shift Lever Override. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Inspection 8 8 Shoulder Belts 3 5

Operating Instructions....37 Signals, Turn....90, 176

Pregnant Women....4 2 Snow Chains (Tire Chains)....280

Pretensioners 42 Snow Tires .273

Rear Seat....3 5 Spare Tire....274, 275, 276

Reminder....157 Spark Plugs....400

Untwisting Procedure 39 Specifications

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Adjustment....100 Oil....400

Heated....105 Speed Control

Security Alarm....16 Accel/Decel....124

Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze)....400 Speed Control (Cruise Control)....121

Sentry Key (Immobilizer) 14 Starting .225

Service Assistance....411 Automatic Transmission....225

Service Contract....413 Cold Weather....226

Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Steering
Power	.243, 244
Tilt Column	.120
Wheel, Tilt	.120
Steering Wheel Audio Controls	.205
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls	.205
Storage	.394
Storage, Vehicle	.394
Storing Your Vehicle	.394
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag	.46
Synthetic Engine Oil	.359
Telescoping Steering Column	.120
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo	.140
Tilt Steering Column	.120
Tire And Loading Information Placard	.263, 264
Tire Markings	.256
Tires	.90, 268, 274, 275, 417
Aging (Life Of Tires)	.278

Air Pressure	.268
Chains	.280
Compact Spare	.275
General Information	.268, 274, 275
High Speed	.271
Inflation Pressures	.269
Life Of Tires	.278
Load Capacity	.263, 264
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)	.282
Pressure Warning Light	.168
Quality Grading	.417
Radial	.271
Replacement	.279
Rotation	.281
Safety	.256, 268
Sizes	.258
Snow Tires	.273
Spare Tire	.274, 275, 276
Spinning	.277

INDEX 435

Trailer Towing....304

Tread Wear Indicators .....277

Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Towing....297

Disabled Vehicle....343

Guide....301

Recreational....309

Weight....301

Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Traction....240

Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Trailer Towing....297

Cooling System Tips....308

Hitches....300

Minimum Requirements....302

Tips....307

Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Wiring....305

Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Trailer Weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Transaxle Automatic....12, 225

Transmission....230

Automatic....228, 230, 377

Maintenance....377

Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .19

Transporting Pets 85

Tread Wear Indicators .....277

Turn Signals....176

Uconnect Voice Command .....213

Uniform Tire Quality Grades .....417

Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt 39

Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 6

Vehicle Loading....264, 294, 296

Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ..... 7

Vehicle Storage....394

Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Voice Recognition System (VR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Warnings And Cautions 6

Warranty Information....415

Washers, Windshield. 117,

Washing Vehicle....379

Water Driving Through .....241

Wheel And Wheel Trim....381

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ....381

Wind Buffeting. 27

Windows....25 Power....25

Windshield Defroster....89,210

Windshield Washers....1 1 7 , 3 6 5 Fluid....365

Windshield Wiper Blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Windshield Wipers 1 1 7

Wiper Blade Replacement....364

Wrecker Towing....343

INSTALLATIONOFRADIOTRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT

Specialdesignconsiderationsareincorporatedinto this vehicle'selectronicsystemtoprovideimmunitytoradio frequencysignals.Mobiletwo-wayradiosandtelephone equipmentmustbeinstalledproperlybytrainedpersonnel.Thefollowingmustbeobservedduringinstallation.

The positive power connections should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. Then negative power connections should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection should not be fused.

Antennasfortwo-wayradiosshouldbemountedonthe roofotherearareaofthevehicle.Careshouldbeused inmountingantennaswithmagnetbases.Magnetsmay affecttheaccuracyoroperationofthecompasson vehiclessoequipped.

Theantennacableshouldbeasshortaspracticaland routedawayfromthevehiclewiringwhenpossible.Use onlyfullyshieldedcoaxialcable.

Carefully match the antenna and cable to other radioto ensure a low standing wave ratio (SWR).

Mobileradioequipmentwithoutoutputpowergreaterthan normalmayrequirespecialprecautions.

Allinstallationsshouldbecheckedforpossibleinterferencebetweenthecommunicationsequipmentandthe vehicle'selectronicsystems.

RAM

COMMERCIAL

STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®

16VM-126-AD

©2016 FCA US LLC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

RAM IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF FCA US LLC.

FOURTHEDITION

PRINTED IN U.S.A.